Before You Begin
Before performing any of the following procedures, investigate all alarms and clear any trouble conditions. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide
as necessary.
Caution Provisioning TXP and MXP cards can be service affecting. You should make all changes during a scheduled maintenance window.
This section lists the chapter procedures (NTPs). Turn to a procedure for applicable tasks (DLPs).
1. G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules—Complete this procedure to provision a multirate pluggable port module (PPM), provision or change the optical line rate of a PPM, or delete a PPM. PPMs provide the fiber interface to the TXP, MXP, and ADM-10G cards. With the exception of the TXP_MR_10G card, all TXPs, MXPs, and ADM-10G cards accept PPMs.
2. G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group—As needed, complete this procedure for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that will be protected with Y-cable protection.
3. G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card—As needed, complete this procedure to create a splitter protection group for an OTU2_XP card.
4. G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards—As needed, complete this procedure to create 1+1 protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
5. G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
6. G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
7. G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to provision the transmission settings for ADM-10G cards.
8. G333 Add an ADM-10G card to an Existing Topology—As needed, complete this procedure to add an ADM-10G card to an existing topology.
9. G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
10. G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
11. G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
12. G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for 40G-MXP-C card.
13. G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the channel group settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
14. G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the CFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
15. G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the EFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
16. G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the REP settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
17. G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
18. G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring—As needed, complete this procedure to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring.
19. G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds—As needed, complete this procedure to change the transmission settings for OTU2_XP cards.
20. G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings—As needed, complete this procedure to change the automatic laser shutdown settings for a TXP or MXP card.
21. G192 Force FPGA Update—As needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards.
22. G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group—As needed, complete this procedure to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards when the card is part of a protection group.
23. G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator—As needed, complete this procedure to enable error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
Note Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM supports IBM's 5G DDR (Double Data Rate) InfiniBand interfaces.
NTP-G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules
Purpose
|
Complete this procedure to provision a multirate PPM, provision the optical line rate of a multirate PPM, or delete a single-rate or multirate PPM.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G63 Install an SFP or XFP
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note If a single-rate PPM is installed, the PPM screen will autoprovision and no further steps are necessary.
Note When you autoprovision a PPM, initial alarm and TCA defaults are supplied by Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) depending on your port and rate selections and the type of PPM. These default values can be changed after you install the PPM.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC to log into an ONS 15454 on the network. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Click the
Alarms
tab:
a. Verify that the alarm filter is not turned on. See the G128 Disable Alarm Filtering as necessary.
b. Verify that no unexplained conditions appear. If unexplained conditions appear, resolve them before continuing. Refer to the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Troubleshooting Guide
.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card, complete the G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode. If not, continue with Step 4
Step 4 If you are provisioning a MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card, complete the G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode. If not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 If you are provisioning a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card, complete the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode. If not, continue with Step 6.
Step 6 If you are provisioning a OTU2_XP card, complete the G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 If you are provisioning a PPM on an ADM-10G card, complete the G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port. If not, continue with Step 8.
Step 8 Complete the G277 Provision a Multirate PPM for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP ports with multirate PPMs. If you already preprovisioned the multirate PPM (G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot), skip this step and continue with Step 9.
Step 9 If you are provisioning an IBM ETR_CLO (External Time Reference – Control Link Oscillator) or InterSystem Coupling Link (ISC) service on the PPM, complete G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services. Otherwise, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Complete the G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate to assign a line rate to a TXP, MXP, or OTU2_XP port after the PPM is provisioned. (This task is not performed for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.)
Step 11 If you need to delete a PPM at any point in this procedure, complete the G280 Delete a PPM.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G235 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the card mode for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards. The card mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > SONET
(ANSI) or
SDH
(ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Click the
Admin State
table cell and choose
OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or
Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click
Apply
, then
Yes
.
Step 4 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Client
tabs.
Step 5 Locate the Trunk port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If the service state is correct, continue with Step 6. If not, complete the following steps:
a. Click the
Admin State
table cell and choose
OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or
Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click
Apply
, then
Yes
.
Step 6 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 7 Change the Card Mode as needed:
-
FC-GE—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FC2G (Port 1-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only), FICON2G (Port 1-1 only), and ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 8-1).
-
Mixed—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G and ONE_GE (Port 1–1 only), ESCON (Ports 5–1 through 8-1 only)
-
ESCON—Choose this option if you will provision the ESCON PPM on Ports 1-1 through 8-1.
Note The Provisioning > Card tab also has the display-only Tunable Wavelengths field. This field shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths.
For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82.
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G332 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Port Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the port mode for the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards. The port mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned on the ports.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards have two port mode groups, one for Ports 1 through 4, and the second for Ports 5 through 8. To change the port mode, all ports within the selected port group must be in OOS (out-of-service) service state. Ports in the second port group do not need to be in OOS service state if you are not changing the port mode for the second port group. Before you change the port mode, you must also ensure that any PPM port rate provisioned for the selected port group is deleted (see G280 Delete a PPM).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to change the port mode.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 3 Change the port mode as described in
Table 6-1
.
Note The PPM port rates are provisioned in the G277 Provision a Multirate PPM.
Table 6-1 10G Data Muxponder Card Port Modes
|
|
|
Port 1-4 Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation for Ports 1-1 through 4-1.
|
Chose one of the following:
-
FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
-
FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
|
Port 5-8 Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation for Ports 5-1 through 8-1.
|
Chose one of the following:
-
FC-GE_ISC—choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), FC2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), FICON2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 5-1 through 8-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 5-1 and 7-1 only).
-
FC4G—choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM port rate (Port 5-1 only).
|
Note The Provisioning > Cards tab also has a display-only Tunable Wavelengths field which shows the wavelengths supported by the card. If a MXP_MR_10DME_C card is installed, the 32 C-band wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DME_L card is installed, the 32 L-band wavelengths appear. If the MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card is installed, the 82 C-band wavelengths appear.
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
Note Loopbacks on MXP-MR-10DME are not applicable when Fiber Channel switches are present.
Note If the Fiber Channel switch version is not present then the Distance Extension settings are not supported.
DLP-G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card mode. 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch or a 10G Ethernet TXP. GE_XP and GE_XPE cards can be provisioned as a Layer 2 Ethernet switch, 10G Ethernet MXP, or 20G Ethernet MXP.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click
Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ports
.
Step 3 Verify that any provisioned client or trunk ports have an
OOS-MA,DSBLD
(ANSI) or
Locked-enabled,disabled
(ETSI) service state in the Service State
column
.
If so, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose
OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or
Locked,disabled
(ETSI).
b. Repeat Step
a
for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click
Apply
.
Step 4 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 5 Choose one of the card modes shown in
Table 6-2
.
:
Table 6-2 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Modes
|
|
|
L2 over DWDM
|
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
|
Provisions the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE as a Layer 2 switch.
|
10GE TXP
|
10GE_XP
10GE_XPE
|
Provisions the 10GE_XP or 10GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet transponder. Traffic received on the 10GE client Port 1-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 3-1, and traffic received on 10 Gigabit Ethernet client Port 2-1 is sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 4-1.
|
10GE MXP
|
GE_XP
GE_XPE
|
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 10 Gigabit Ethernet muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 1-1 through 10-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 21-1, and traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 11-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 22-1.
|
20GE MXP
|
GE_XP
GE_XPE
|
Provisions the GE_XP or GE_XPE as a 20 Gigabit Ethernet muxponder. Traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet client Ports 1-1 through 20-1 is multiplexed and sent to 10 Gigabit Ethernet trunk Port 21-1. Trunk port 22-1 is not used.
|
The GE-XP and GE-XPE cards operating in 10GE MXP mode and configured for 100% traffic flow, do not drop frames when up to nine ports are in use. However, when all the ten ports are in use, some frames are dropped. When the tenth port is to be used, configure the Committed Info Rate (CIR) at 55% on any one of the ports. For more information about configuring the CIR, see the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.
Step 6 Click
Apply
, then click
Yes
in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
Purpose
|
This task provisions a fixed-rate PPM and port on an ADM-10G PPM card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning
> Pluggable Port Modules
tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
-
PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
-
PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click
OK
. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 7 In the Create Ports dialog box, complete the following:
-
Port—Choose the port you want to configure from the drop-down list.
-
Port Type—Choose the port type, such as OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or ONE-GE from the drop-down list.
– Ports 1 - 8 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or ONE_GE
– Ports 9 - 12 can on be OC-3 or OC-12
– Ports 13 - 16 can only be OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48
Step 8 Click
OK
. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Ports area. The port type you provisioned is listed in the Rate column.
Step 9 If you want to provision a PPM or another port, repeat Steps
4
through
8
.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTU2_XP card mode. The card mode determines which PPMs can be provisioned for the card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Caution Changing the card configuration to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy automatically replaces the current port configurations (Ports 1 and 3) to 10G Ethernet and OC192. This resets and reboots the OTU2_XP card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the card mode.
Step 2 In card view, click the
Provisioning > Line > Ports
tab.
Step 3 Verify that all provisioned client or trunk ports have an OOS-MA, DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled, disabled (ETSI) service state in the Service State column. If so, continue with
Step 4
. If not, complete the following substeps.
a. For the first port that is not out of service, in the Admin State column, choose
OOS, DSBLD
(ANSI) or
Locked, disabled
(ETSI).
b. Repeat Step
a
for each port that is not out of service.
c. Click
Apply
.
Step 4 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tab.
Step 5 Change the Card Configuration as needed:
-
Transponder
—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder. Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as transponders. This is the default card configuration.
-
Standard Regen
—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a standard regenerator (with E-FEC only on one port). Port pairs 1-3 and 2-4 are both configured as regenerators.
-
Enhanced FEC
—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as an E-FEC regenerator (with E-FEC on two ports). Port pair 3-4 is configured as enhanced regenerator. Ports 1 and 2 are not used.
-
Mixed
—Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card as a transponder and a standard regenerator (mixed configuration). One of the port pair (1-3 or 2-4) is configured as a transponder and the other port pair as a standard regenerator.
-
10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy—
Choose this option to provision the OTU2_XP card to enable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 1-3 supports LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion. Port pair 2-4 can be configured either as a transponder or a standard regenerator.
Note If you revert to the previous release (release earlier than 9.10), be sure to disable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy conversion feature. If you do not disable the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature, an error message stating that the user needs to disable 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy feature before reverting to the previous release is displayed.
Note Table 6-126 lists the Ethernet variables supported on Ports 1 and 3 of the OTU2_XP card that has the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy enabled. When the card is in the 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, no 10G FC RMONS are supported on Ports 2 and 4.
For more information on OTU2_XP card configuration rules, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
Step 6 Click
Apply
. Then click
Yes
in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
Purpose
|
This task provisions a multirate PPM on a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note If the PPM was preprovisioned using the G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot this task is unnecessary, unless the PPM has an Out-of-Service and Autonomous Management, Unassigned (OOS-AUMA,UAS) (ANSI) or unlocked-disabled, unassigned (ETSI) service state.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning
> Pluggable Port Modules
tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
-
PPM—Choose the PPM slot number where the SFP is installed from the drop-down list.
-
PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click
OK
. The newly created port appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 6 If you want to provision a PPM on another port, repeat Steps
3
through
5
. If not, continue with Step 7.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G274 Verify Topologies for ETR_CLO and ISC Services
Purpose
|
This task verifies that the DWDM network topology can support the IBM ETR_CLO and ISC services.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Cisco TransportPlanner site plan
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display your site plan in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Step 2 Verify that the topology where you plan to run the ETR_CLO or ISC service can support the service. The following topologies support ETR_CLO or ISC:
-
Single span—Two terminal sites with no intermediate sites in between and one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Figure 6-1 shows a single-span topology as displayed in Cisco Transport Planner.
Figure 6-1 Single-Span Topology
-
Point-to-Point—Two terminal sites with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the terminal sites, but intermediate (traffic terminating) sites cannot be installed. Figure 6-2 shows a point-to-point topology as shown in Cisco TransportPlanner.
Figure 6-2 Point-to-Point Topology
-
Two hubs—Two hub nodes in a ring with one of the following sets of cards installed:
– 32MUX-O and 32DMX-O cards
– 32WSS and 32DMX cards
– 32WSS and 32-DMX-O cards
– 40-MUX-C and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
– 40-WSS-C/40-WSS-CE and 40-DMX-C/40-DMX-CE cards
Line amplifiers can be installed between the hubs. Figure 6-3 shows two hub nodes with no line amplifier nodes installed. Figure 6-4 shows two hub nodes with line amplifier nodes installed.
Figure 6-3 Hubs with No Line Amplifiers
Figure 6-4 Hubs with Line Amplifiers
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
Note The optical line rate for cards with single-rate PPMs is provisioned automatically when you complete the G277 Provision a Multirate PPM if the trunk port is out of service. If the optical line rate was provisioned automatically, you do not need to complete this task for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card. If the trunk port was in-service when you provisioned the PPM, complete this task to provision the optical line rate manually for those cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card where you want to provision PPM ports. If the data rate that you are provisioning is DV-6000, HDTV, ESCON, SDI/D1 Video, ISC1, ISC3 (for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards), or ETR_CLO, complete the following steps. Otherwise, continue with Step 4.
a. Click the
Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines
tabs.
b. In the ITU-T G.709 OTN field for the respective PPM, choose
Disable
.
c. In the FEC field for the respective PPM, choose
Disable
.
d. Click
Apply
.
Step 2 For the TXP_MR-10G card, click the
Provisioning > Data Rate Selection
tabs. For all other cards, go to Step
4
.
Step 3 In the Data Rate Selection area, click
Create
and choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The supported port types are SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy) and 10G Ethernet LAN Phy.
Step 4 Click the
Provisioning
> Pluggable Port Modules
tabs.
Step 5 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Port dialog box appears.
Step 6 In the Create Port dialog box, complete the following:
-
Port—Choose the port and port number from the drop-down list. The first number indicates the PPM in the Pluggable Port Modules area, and the second number indicates the port number on the PPM. For example, the first PPM with one port appears as 1-1 and the second PPM with one port appears as 2-1. The PPM number can be 1 to 4, but the port number is always 1.
-
Port Type—Choose the type of port from the drop-down list. The port type list displays the supported port rates on your PPM. See Table 6-3 for definitions of the supported rates on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card.
Step 7 Click
OK
. The row in the Pluggable Ports area turns white if the physical SFP is installed and light blue if the SFP is not installed.
If the optical parameter values differ from the NE Default settings, change the port state to In-Service (for ANSI) or Unlocked (for ETSI) to synchronize the values with the NE Default settings.
Step 8 Repeat Steps
5
through
7
to configure the rest of the port rates as needed.
Table 6-3 PPM Port Types
|
|
TXP_MR_2.5G
TXPP_MR_2.5G
|
-
OC-3/STM1—155 Mbps
-
OC-12/STM4—622 Mbps
-
OC-48/STM16—2.48 Gbps
-
ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps
-
ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal)
-
DV6000—Proprietary signal from video vendor
-
SDI_D1_VIDEO—Serial Digital Interface and Digital Video signal type 1
-
HDTV—High Definition Television
-
PASS-THRU—Not specified
-
FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps
-
FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps
-
FICON1G—Fiber connectivity1.06 Gbps (IBM signal)
-
FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal)
-
ETR_CLO—External Time Reference–Control Link Oscillator
-
ISC compat—InterSystem Coupling Link 1 (ISC1)
-
ISC peer—InterSystem Coupling Link 3 (ISC3)
-
DVB-ASI — Proprietary signal from video vendor. Digital Video Broadcast - Asynchronous Serial Interface
-
ISC1— InterSystem Channel 1 Gbps (IBM signal)
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
MXP_2.5G_10E
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
|
|
TXP_MR_10G
|
-
SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
-
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
|
-
SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy—10 Gbps
-
10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
-
10G Fibre Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
-
(TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
|
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
|
If the card mode is FC_GE:
-
FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
-
FC2G ISL—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
-
FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 and 2-1)
-
FICON2G ISL—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Port 1-1 only)
-
ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 and 2-1 only)
If the card mode is Mixed:
-
FC1G ISL—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
-
FICON1G ISL—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) (Port1-1 only)
-
ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Port 1-1 only)
-
ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) (Ports 5-1 through 8-1)
If the card mode is ESCON:
-
ESCON—Enterprise System Connection 200 Mbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
|
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
|
If the port mode is FC_GE_ISC:
-
FC1G—Fibre Channel 1.06 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
-
FC2G—Fibre Channel 2.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
-
FICON1G—Fiber connectivity 1.06 Gbps (IBM signal) FICON2G—Fiber connectivity 2.125 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
-
ONE_GE—One Gigabit Ethernet 1.125 Gbps (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
-
ISC COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
-
ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 8-1)
-
ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1, 3-1, 5-1, and 7-1 only; ports are not available if the port that follows—2-1, 4-1, 6-1, or 8-1—has a PPM provisioned.)
If the port mode is FC4G:
-
FC4G—Fibre Channel 4.25 Gbps (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
-
FICON4G—Fiber connectivity 4.25 Gbps (IBM signal) (Ports 1-1 or 5-1 only; ports are not available if any of the three ports that follow has a PPM provisioned.)
|
40G-MXP-C
|
-
SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64)
-
FC8G
-
FC10G
-
TEN_GE
-
OTU2
|
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
|
-
GE_XP and GE_XPE client ports1
-
10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE client and trunk ports; GE_XP and GE_XPE trunk ports1
|
OTU2_XP
|
-
SONET (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)—10 Gbps
-
10G Ethernet LAN Phy—10 Gbps Ethernet
-
10G Fiber Channel—10 Gbps Fibre Channel
-
IB_5G—InfiniBand 5 Gbps
Note If you have an OTU2 signal in which the OPU2 has been generated by multiplexing four ODU1 signals, choose SONET as the port rate. This allows the OTU2 signal to be transported transparently in standard or E-FEC regenerator configuration.
|
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G280 Delete a PPM
Note Before deleting a PPM, delete the PPM from the provisioning pane.
Note This task does not apply to the TXP_MR_10G card. To change the TXP_MR_10G data rate, complete the G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate.
Note You cannot delete a PPM if the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card is part of a regenerator group. For OTU2_XP card, you cannot delete a PPM if the card configuration is in Standard Regen or Enhanced FEC mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card where you want to delete PPM settings.
Step 2 Verify that the PPM port Service State is
OOS,DSBLD
. If the PPM port is
OOS,DSBLD
, go to Step
3
. If it is not OOS,DSBLD, follow the tasks in G128 Manage Pluggable Port Modules, to change the Service State of the PPM port to
OOS,DSBLD
.
Step 3 Click the
Provisioning
> Pluggable Port Modules
tabs.
Step 4 To delete a PPM and the associated ports:
a. In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click the PPM that you want to delete. The highlight changes to dark blue.
b. Click Delete. The Delete PPM dialog box appears.
c. Click
Yes
. The PPM provisioning is removed from the Pluggable Port Modules area and the Pluggable Ports area.
Note You cannot delete a PPM until its port is in the OOS,DSBLD state. You cannot delete a client port if the client is in the In Service and Normal (IS-NR) (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state, is in a protection group, has a generic communications channel (GCC) or data communications channel (DCC), is a timing source, has circuits or overhead circuits, or transports Link Management Protocol channels or links. You can delete a client port (except the last port) if the trunk port is in service and the client port is in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state. You can delete the last client port only if the trunk port is in a OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI) service state for all cards except the MXP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards. For more information about port states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 Verify that the PPM provisioning is deleted:
-
In the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, or OTU2_XP card view, CTC shows an empty port after the PPM is deleted.
-
If the SFP or XFP is physically present when you delete the PPM provisioning, CTC transitions to the deleted state, the ports (if any) are deleted, and the PPM is represented as a gray graphic in CTC. The SFP or XFP can be provisioned again in CTC, or the equipment can be removed. If the equipment is removed, the graphic disappears.
Step 6 If you need to remove the PPM hardware (the SFP or XFP), complete the G64 Remove an SFP or XFP.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G33 Create a Y-Cable Protection Group
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a Y-cable protection group between the client ports of two TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards. For additional information about Y-cable protection, see the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Installed TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
“NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
G46 Log into CTC
G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Y-cable protection is available for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in 10GE MXP, 20GE MXP, or 10GE TXP mode. Y-cable protection cannot be provisioned for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when they are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. Y-cable protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in the TXP card mode. Y-cable protection is not supported on IB_5G.
Note If you are provisioning Y-cable protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards, the Ethernet mode must be set to 1000 and 10000 Mbps respectively. To provision the Ethernet mode, see the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.
Note There is a traffic hit of upto a couple hundred milliseconds on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXP_MR_10DME cards in Y-cable configuration when a fiber cut or SFP failure occurs on one of the client ports.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the ports are not in a Y-cable protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 4-1) for your site. Verify the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards that need Y-cable protection groups. (Cards requiring Y-cable protection are indicated with “Y-Cable” in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the
Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide
for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards are installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6.
Table 6-4
lists the protection types available in the ONS 15454 for DWDM client cards.
Table 6-4 Protection Types
|
|
Description and Installation Requirements
|
Y-cable
|
MXP_2.5_10G
MXP_2.5_10E
MXP_2.5_10E_C
MXP_2.5_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
TXP_MR_10G
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_2.5G
MXP_MR_10DME_C
MXP_MR_10DME_L
MXP_MR_10DMEX_C
40G-MXP-C
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
OTU2_XP
|
Pairs a working transponder or muxponder card or port with a protect transponder or muxponder card or port. The protect port must be on a different card than the working port and it must be the same card type as the working port. The working and protect port numbers must be the same, that is, Port 1 can only protect Port 1, Port 2 can only protect Port 2, and so on.
Note Working and Protect card must be in the same shelf for a multishelf node.
|
Splitter
|
TXPP_MR_2.5G
MXPP_MR_2.5G
|
A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name.
|
OTU2_XP
|
A splitter protection group is configurable for the OTU2_XP card. You can create a splitter protection group on Ports 3 and 4 of the OTU2_XP card using the G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card.
|
1+1
|
GE_XP
10GE_XP
GE_XPE
10GE_XPE
|
In the Layer 2 (L2) card mode 1+1 protection is provided to protect the card against client port and card failure.
|
Step 3 Verify that pluggable ports are provisioned for the same payload and payload rate on the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP cards where you will create the Y-cable protection group:
a. Display the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the
Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module
tab.
c. Verify that a pluggable port is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and the payload type and rate is provisioned for it in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, for example, if the pluggable port and rate are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot or replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the G64 Remove an SFP or XFP.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), click the
Provisioning
>
Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click
Create
.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
-
Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
-
Type—Choose
Y Cable
from the drop-down list.
-
Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you can not complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the G353 Preprovision a Slot.
Step 7 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in Protect Ports. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
-
Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
-
Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional switching option is available for Y-cable protection groups only in the following cases:
-
On the MXP_MR_10DME card when ISC3_PEER_1G/ISC3_PEER_2G is the client payload.
-
On the MXP_MR_10DME and MXP_MR_2.5G cards when Fibre Channel is the client payload. In this case Bidirectional switching is:
– Automatically enabled when Distance Extension is enabled.
– Automatically disabled when Distance Extension is disabled.
The Bidirectional switching option is available for all SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 9 Click
OK
.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every Y-cable protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G199 Create a Splitter Protection Group for the OTU2_XP Card
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a splitter protection group between the trunk ports of an OTU2_XP card. For additional information about splitter protection, see the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Installed OTU2_XP card
Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
“NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
G46 Log into CTC
G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note A splitter protection group is automatically created when a TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card is installed. You can edit the splitter protection group name for these cards. The splitter protection group is deleted when you delete the TXPP_MR_2.5G, MXPP_MR_2.5G, or PSM card.
Note Splitter protection is available for the OTU2_XP card when it is provisioned in Transponder configuration only. In a splitter-protected Transponder configuration, Port 1 is the client port, Port 3 is the working trunk port, and Port 4 is the standby trunk port.
Note For SONET or SDH payloads, Loss of Pointer Path (LOP-P) alarms can occur on a split signal if the ports are not in a splitter protection group.
Step 1 View the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix (see Table 4-1) for your site. Verify which OTU2_XP card needs a splitter protection group. (Cards requiring splitter protection are indicated with “Splitter” in the Traffic Matrix table Protection Type column. Refer to the
Cisco TransportPlanner DWDM Operations Guide
for more information.)
Step 2 Verify that the OTU2_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6.
Step 3 Verify that the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned for the same payload rate as the pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card where you will create the splitter protection group:
a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the
Provisioning > Pluggable Port Module
tabs.
c. Verify that a pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is provisioned in the Pluggable Port Module area, and that the payload rate of the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) slot is same as the payload rate of the pluggable port on the OTU2_XP card provisioned in the Pluggable Ports area. If they are not the same, you must either delete the provisioned rate and create a new rate to match using the
G273 Preprovision an SFP or XFP Slot
or replace the pluggable port (SFP or XFP) using the
G64 Remove an SFP or XFP
.
Step 4 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), click the
Provisioning
>
Protection
tabs.
Step 5 In the Protection Groups area, click
Create
.
Step 6 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
-
Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
-
Type—Choose
Splitter
from the drop-down list.
-
Protect Card—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port to the active port. The list displays the available OTU2_XP ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed or if the trunk ports of the card are part of a regenerator group, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Cards list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the G353 Preprovision a Slot.
Step 7 From the Available Cards list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in Protect Cards. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Cards list.
Step 8 Complete the remaining fields:
-
Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
-
Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared.
Note The Bidirectional Switching option is not applicable for splitter protection groups.
Step 9 Click
OK
.
Step 10 Repeat this procedure for every splitter protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G198 Create 1+1 Protection for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group to protect against client port and card failure of GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE cards. For additional information about 1+1 protection, see the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
“NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
“NTP-G14 Install DWDM Equipment” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
G139 Verify Cisco TransportPlanner Reports and Files
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to protect the card against client port and card failure. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6.
Step 3 Complete the G242 Create an Internal Patchcord Manually by selecting the Trunk to Trunk (L2) option, at the trunk port where you want to create 1+1 protection.
Step 4 Complete the G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards to create a protection group.
Step 5 Configure the standby port behavior, by setting the Protection Action to
None
or
Squelch
. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the, G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.
Note Do not enable squelch in a 1 + 1 protection group, if the 100FX, 100LX, and ONS-SE-ZE-EL SFP are used in the protection group and is connected to the peer via the parallel cable (not Y-cable).
Note When you configure L2 1 + 1 protection on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, set the Protection Action to None on the client ports. Setting the Protection Action as Squelch results in unexpected switching behavior.
Step 6 Configure the standby and active port speed, by setting the mode parameter to Auto or 1000 or any other values. For detailed information on how to configure the standby port behavior, see the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G461 Create a 1+1 Protection Group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This procedure creates a 1+1 protection group for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE slots where internal patchcords were created.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G344 Verify Provisionable and Internal Patchcords
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the
Provisioning
>
Protection
tabs.
Step 2 In the Protection Groups area, click
Create
.
Step 3 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:
-
Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Special characters are permitted. For TL1 compatibility, do not use question mark (?), backslash (\), or double quote (“) characters.
-
Type—Choose
L2 1+1 (port)
from the drop-down list.
-
Protect Port—From the drop-down list, choose the port that will be the standby or protection port for the active port. The list displays the available transponder or muxponder ports. If transponder or muxponder cards are not installed, no ports appear in the drop-down list.
After you choose the protect port, a list of available working ports appear in the Available Ports list. If no cards are available, no ports appear. If this occurs, you cannot complete this task until you install the physical cards or preprovision the ONS 15454 slots using the G353 Preprovision a Slot.
Step 4 From the Available Ports list, select the port that will be protected by the port you selected in the Protected Port drop-down list. Click the top arrow button to move the port to the Working Ports list.
Step 5 Complete the remaining fields:
-
Revertive—Check this check box if you want traffic to revert to the working port after failure conditions remain corrected for the amount of time entered in the Reversion Time field.
-
Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, select a reversion time from the drop-down list. The range is 0.5 to 12.0 minutes. The default is 5.0 minutes. Reversion time is the amount of time that will elapse before the traffic reverts to the working card. The reversion timer starts after conditions causing the switch are cleared.
The bidirectional switching option is available for SONET and SDH 1+1 protection groups.
Step 6 Click
OK
.
Step 7 Repeat this procedure for every 1+1 protection group indicated in the Cisco TransportPlanner Traffic Matrix.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G98 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G229 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-5
.
Note The Card subtab Framing Type and Tunable Wavelengths fields are display-only. Framing Type shows the card framing type, either SONET or SDH, depending on whether the card is installed in an ANSI or ETSI chassis. The Tunable Wavelengths field shows the tunable wavelengths for the physical TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G that is installed.
Table 6-5 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Settings
|
|
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation (option only supported for SONET/SDH payloads). Refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
for more details.
|
-
Transparent
-
Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (ETSI)
-
Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (ETSI)
|
Regeneration Peer Slot
|
Sets the slot containing another TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards that are in a regeneration peer group.
|
-
None
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
|
Regeneration Group Name
|
Sets the regeneration peer group name.
|
User defined
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G230 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the client port of the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > SONET
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-6
.
Note The 2.5G multirate transponder trunk settings are provisioned in the G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds.
Table 6-6 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
-
1
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G card only)
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
-
IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
|
-
Disabled (default)
-
Auto Restart
-
Manual Restart
-
Manual Restart for Test
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
Options: ANSI/ETSI
-
Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
-
SR
-
SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
-
IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance
-
IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
-
LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
-
LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
-
LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
AINS Soak
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) The optical transport type.
|
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G231 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task only applies to SONET services.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Section Trace
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-7
.
Table 6-7 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Section Trace
Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
-
1
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this display updated automatically.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G367 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in
Table 6-8
.
Table 6-8 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is installed, the wavelengths it carries are identified with two asterisks. Other wavelengths have a dark grey background. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G232 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder SONET or SDH Line Threshold Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds
tabs.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in
Table 6-9
.
Note Some parameters and options in Table 6-9 do not apply to all TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If a parameter or option does not apply, that parameter or option does not appear in CTC.
Table 6-9 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Line Thresholds Settings
for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Payloads
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
-
1
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
-
1
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G320 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line remote monitoring (RMON) threshold settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In card view, display the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See
Table 6-10
for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-10 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card 1G Ethernet and 1G FC/FICON
Thresholds
|
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors
|
Number of IETF 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
8b10bIdleOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing idle ordered sets.
|
8b10bNonIdleOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
|
8b10bDataOrderedSets
|
Number of received packets containing data ordered sets.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list,
choose either
Relative
or
Absolute
. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter the appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click
OK
.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G305 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note In this task, trunk port refers to Port 2 for TXP_MR_2.5G cards, and to Ports 2 and 3 for TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Pluggable Port Modules
tab. Under Pluggable Ports, record the Rate that is provisioned.
Step 3 Look up the rate in
Table 6-11
and note whether it is 2R or 3R.
Table 6-11 2R and 3R Mode and ITU-T G.709 Compliance by Client Interface
|
|
|
|
OC-48/STM-16
|
2.488 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
DV-6000
|
2.38 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
2 Gigabit Fibre Channel (2G-FC)/fiber connectivity (FICON)
|
2.125 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
High-Definition Television (HDTV)
|
1.48 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
Gigabit Ethernet (GE)
|
1.25 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
1 Gigabit Fibre Channel (1G-FC)/FICON
|
1.06 Gbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
OC-12/STM-4
|
622 Mbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
OC-3/STM-1
|
155 Mbps
|
3R
|
On or Off
|
Enterprise System Connection (ESCON)
|
200 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
SDI/D1 video
|
270 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
ISC-1 Compact
|
1.06 Gbps
|
3R
|
Off
|
ISC-3
|
1.06 or 2.125 Gbps
|
2R
|
—
|
ETR_CLO
|
16 Mbps
|
2R
|
—
|
Step 4 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Step 5 Under
Types
, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it and click
Refresh
.
Step 6 Referring to
Table 6-12
, verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High and RX Power Low depending on whether the rate is 2R or 3R. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-12 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
|
|
|
3R
|
–23 dBm
|
–9 dBm
|
2R
|
–24 dBm
|
–9 dBm
|
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
Step 8 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 9 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm, and for RX Power Low is –26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Step 10 Click
Apply
.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G306 Provision the 2.5G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to
Table 6-13
, verify the Port 1 (client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-13 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
|
|
|
|
OC-3
|
15454-SFP3-1-IR
|
–23
|
–8
|
–21
|
–2
|
STM-1
|
15454E-SFP-L.1.1
|
–24
|
–10
|
–21
|
–2
|
OC-12
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
–28
|
–7
|
–21
|
–2
|
STM-4
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
–28
|
–8
|
–21
|
–2
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
–18
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
–18
|
0
|
–11
|
6
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
–18
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–17
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
ESCON
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
–21
|
–14
|
–35
|
–8
|
DV6000
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
–18
|
0
|
–11
|
6
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
–18
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
SDI_D1_ VIDEO
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
–28
|
–7
|
–21
|
–2
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
–28
|
–8
|
–21
|
–2
|
HDTV
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
PASS-THRU
|
2R MODE
(not specified)
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–17
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–15
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–17
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–15
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
ETR_CLO
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
–17
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
ISC compat
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
ISC peer
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 6 Referring to
Table 6-14
, verify the Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Table 6-14 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
|
|
|
|
OC-3
|
15454-SFP3-1-IR
|
–26
|
–5
|
–17
|
–6
|
STM-1
|
15454E-SFP-L.1.1
|
–27
|
–7
|
–17
|
–6
|
OC-12
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
–31
|
–4
|
–17
|
–6
|
STM-4
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
–31
|
–5
|
–17
|
–6
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
–21
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
–21
|
3
|
–7
|
2
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
–21
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–12
|
–2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
ESCON
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
–24
|
–11
|
–31
|
–12
|
DV6000
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
–21
|
3
|
–7
|
2
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
–21
|
0
|
–12
|
–5
|
SDI_D1_ VIDEO
|
15454-SFP12-4-IR
|
–31
|
–4
|
–17
|
–6
|
15454E-SFP-L.4.1
|
–31
|
–5
|
–17
|
–6
|
HDTV
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
PASS-THRU
|
2R MODE
(not specified)
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–12
|
–2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–18
|
3
|
–12
|
–2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–12
|
–2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–18
|
3
|
–12
|
–2
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
ETR_CLO
|
15454-SFP-200
15454E-SFP-200
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
–20
|
3
|
–12
|
–2
|
ISC compat
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
ISC peer
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–12
|
–1
|
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G234 Change the 2.5G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTN settings for TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_2.5G or TXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > OTN
tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs:
OTN Lines
,
G.709 Thresholds
,
FEC Thresholds
, or
Trail Trace Identifier
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables
6-15
through
6-18
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM settings independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-15
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-15 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card OTN Line Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) The signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
Table 6-16
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-16 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
Table 6-17
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-17 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card FEC Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-18
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-18 TXP_MR_2.5G and TXPP_MR_2.5G Transponder Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
-
2 (Trunk)
-
3 (Trunk) (TXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable FDI on TIM
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G96 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for 10G multirate transponder cards including the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
G63 Install an SFP or XFP
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM (if necessary)
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate (if necessary)
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The TXP_MR_10G card does not support PPMs.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the transponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 If you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10G card, complete the G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate, and if you are provisioning a TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card, complete the G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate. If not, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G365 Provision the TXP_MR_10G Data Rate
Purpose
|
This task changes the TXP_MR_10G card data rate.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Data Rate Selection
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
.
Step 4 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
-
SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
-
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
Step 5 Click
Ok
.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G712 Provision the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C Data Rate
Purpose
|
This task changes the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card data rate.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10E or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the card data rate settings.
Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Pluggable Port Modules tabs.
Step 3 In the Pluggable Port Modules area, click Create. The Create PPM dialog box appears.
Step 4 In the Create PPM dialog box, complete the following:
-
PPM—Choose the SFP you want to install from the drop-down list.
-
PPM Type—Choose the number of ports supported by your SFP from the drop-down list. If only one port is supported, PPM (1 port) is the only option.
Step 5 Click OK. The newly created PPM appears in the Pluggable Port Modules area. The row in the Pluggable
Step 6 Port Modules area turns white and the Actual Equipment Type column lists the equipment name.
Step 7 In the Pluggable Ports area, click Create. The Create Ports dialog box appears.
Step 8 In the Create Port dialog box, choose one of the following data rates:
-
SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) (including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy)
-
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
-
10G FIBER Channel
-
(TXP-MR-10EX_C card only) IB_5G
Step 9 Click Ok.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure.
DLP-G216 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-19
.
Table 6-19 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Settings
|
|
|
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is only available for SONET/SDH payloads). Refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
for more details.
|
-
Transparent
-
Section (TXP_MR_10E only)
-
Line
|
-
Transparent
-
Regeneration Section (TXP_MR_10E only)
-
Multiplex Section
|
AIS/Squelch
Configuration
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C only) Sets the transparent termination mode configuration.
|
|
|
Regeneration Peer Slot
|
Sets the slot containing another TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card to create a regeneration peer group. A regeneration peer group facilitates the management of two TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C cards that are needed to perform a complete signal regeneration.
The regeneration peer group synchronizes provisioning of the two cards. Payload type and ITU-T G.709 optical transport network (OTN) changes made on one TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card are reflected on the peer TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card.
Note Y-cable protection groups cannot be created on TXP cards that are in a regeneration peer group.
|
-
None
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
|
-
None
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
|
Regeneration Group Name
|
(Display only) The regeneration peer group name.
|
—
|
—
|
Tunable Wavelengths
|
(Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. For the TXP_MR_10E_C, or TXP_MR_10E_L cards, the first and last supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and number of supported wavelengths are shown in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths
. For example, the TXP_MR_10E_C card would show:
1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82
. The TXP_MR_10E show the four wavelengths supported by the card that is installed. The TXP_MR_10G show the two wavelengths supported by the card that is installed.
|
—
|
—
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G217 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > SONET/SDH/Ethernet
tabs. SONET is the option for ANSI shelves when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, SDH is the option for ETSI shelves when 10G Ethernet WAN phy is the Pluggable Port Rate, and Ethernet is the option for ANSI or ETSI shelves when 10GE LAN Phy is the Pluggable Port Rate.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-20
.
Note In Table 6-20, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 6-20 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Line Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
-
1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
-
1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G card)
-
1-1 (OC192) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
-
1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card)
-
1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card)
-
2 (Trunk)
-
(TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
|
-
1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy) (if TXP_MR_10G)
-
1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10G card)
-
1-1 (STM-64) (10G Ethernet WAN Phy on the TXP_MR_10E card)
-
1-1 (TEN_GE) (if Ethernet LAN is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card)
-
1-1 (FC10G) (if 10G fiber channel is provisioned on the TXP_MR_10E card)
-
2 (Trunk)
-
(TXP_MR_10EX_C only) IB_5G
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS
-
IS,AINS
-
OOS,DSBLD
-
OOS,MT
|
-
Unlocked
-
Unlocked,automaticInService
-
Locked,disabled
-
Locked,maintenance
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR
-
OOS-AU,AINS
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD
-
OOS-MA,MT
|
-
Unlocked-enabled
-
Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
-
Locked-enabled,disabled
-
Locked-enabled,maintenance
|
SF BER
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
|
SD BER
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
|
Type
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) The optical transport type.
|
|
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
ProvidesSync
|
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a network element (NE) timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
(TXP_MR_10E, OC192 only) Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Max Size
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy only) Sets the maximum Ethernet packet size.
|
-
1548 bytes
-
Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
|
-
1548 bytes
-
Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
|
Incoming MAC Address
|
(TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10G LAN Phy only) Sets the incoming MAC address.
|
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format.
|
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format.
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths: 1310 nm through 1560.61 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note: supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**)
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G218 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line section trace settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab is available for the 10G Multirate Transponder cards only if no PPMs are provisioned, or the OC192 PPM is provisioned. The tab is not available if a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy or 10G Fibre Channel PPM is provisioned.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Section Trace
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-21
.
Table 6-21 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Section Trace Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G368 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Before modifying the wavelength settings, change the port state to OOS,DSBLD (for ANSI) or Locked,disabled (for ETSI) and delete the circuit and patchcord provisioning present on the port. Payload or communication channel provisioning can be retained.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in
Table 6-22
.
Table 6-22 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
Port 2 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned. If the physical TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C is installed, this field is display-only.
|
-
C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
-
L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning for TXP_MR_10E_C, and TXP_MR_10E_L cards. (This field does not apply to TXP_MR_10G or TXP_MR_10E cards.)
|
-
Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
-
Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing, depending on the card that is installed. For TXP_MR_10G and TXP_MR_10E cards, the wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G219 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads Including 10G Ethernet WAN Phy
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying SONET or SDH payloads, including the physical 10G Ethernet WAN Phy payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds
> SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or
SDH Thresholds
(ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-23
.
Note Parameters shown in Table 6-23 do not apply to all 10G multirate transponder cards. If the parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 6-23 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Line Threshold Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
|
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
OFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Out of frame seconds
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G319 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder Line RMON Thresholds for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards carrying the physical 10G Ethernet LAN payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See
Table 6-24
for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-24 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card GE LAN Phy Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
Number of multicast frames received error free.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifInErrorBytePkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of receive error bytes.
|
ifInFramingErrorPkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of receive framing error counters.
|
ifInJunkInterPkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of receive interpacket junk counters.
|
ifOutOctets
(TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
(TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Total number of transmit packets.
|
ifOutMulticastPkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of multicast frames transmitted error free.
|
ifOutBroadcastPkts (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence (FCS).
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of received frames that were larger than the maximum size permitted.
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsFragments
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
|
etherStatsOctets
|
Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
|
rxPauseFrames
(TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of received IETF 802.x pause frames.
|
rxControlFrames
|
Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the MAC control sublayer.
|
rxUnknownOpcodeFrames (TXP_MR_10G only)
|
Number of MAC control frames received that contain an opcode that is not supported by the device.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list,
choose either
Relative
or
Absolute
. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click
OK
.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G301 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C trunk port alarm and threshold cross alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click
Refresh
.
Step 4 Referring to
Table 6-25
, verify the trunk port (Port 2) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit
Enter
, then click
Apply
.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-25 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
|
|
|
|
|
TXP_MR_10G
|
–8 dBm
|
–18 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
–1 dBm
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
|
–9 dBm
|
–18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 7 Referring to
Table 6-26
, verify the trunk port (Port 2) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit
Enter
, then click
Apply
.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-26 10G Multirate Transponder Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
|
|
|
|
|
TXP_MR_10G
|
–8 dBm
|
–20 dBm
|
4 dBm
|
2 dBm
|
TXP_MR_10E
TXP_MR_10E_C
TXP_MR_10E_L
TXP_MR_10EX_C
|
–8 dBm
|
–20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G302 Provision the 10G Multirate Transponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click
Refresh
.
Step 4 Referring to
Table 6-27
, verify the Port 1 (Client) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting the existing value, and entering the new value. Hit Enter, then click
Apply
.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-27 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
SONET (or SDH)
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
–1
|
–11
|
–1
|
–6
|
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
0.5
|
–14.4
|
–1
|
–6
|
10G Fibre Channel
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
0.5
|
–14.4
|
–1
|
–6
|
IB_5G
|
TXP_MR_10EX_C uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 Version 3
|
1.0
|
–14.0
|
5.0
|
12.0
|
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 7 Referring to
Table 6-28
, provision the Port 1 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-28 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
SONET (or SDH)
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
3
|
–16
|
1
|
–8
|
10G Ethernet LAN Phy
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
TXP_MR_10G
(XFP not present)
|
3
|
–16
|
1
|
–8
|
10G Fibre Channel
|
TXP_MR_10E uses
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
3
|
–16
|
1
|
–8
|
IB_5G
|
TXP_MR_10EX_C uses ONS-XC-10G-S1 Version 3
|
3.0
|
–16
|
1.0
|
–8
|
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Change the 10G Multirate Transponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, and TXP_MR_10EX_C transponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > OTN
tabs, then click one of the following subtabs:
OTN Lines
,
G.709 Thresholds
,
FEC Thresholds
, or
Trail Trace Identifier
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables
6-29
through
6-32
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-29
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-29 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card OTN Lines Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the G.709 OTN should be enabled.
|
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E cards, Standard is the same as enabling FEC. For TXP-MR-10EX_C cards, the FEC should be enabled.
|
-
Enable—(TXP_MR_10G only) FEC is on.
-
Disable—FEC is off.
-
Standard—(TXP_MR_10E only) Standard FEC is on.
-
Enhanced—(TXP_MR_10E only) Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
(TXP_MR_10E only) Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
-
Asynch mapping
-
Synch mapping
|
Table 6-30
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-30 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
ES
|
Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Table 6-31
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-31 TXP_MR_10G, TXP_MR_10E, TXP_MR_10E_C, TXP_MR_10E_L, or TXP_MR_10EX_C Card FEC Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
2
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-32
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-32 10G Multirate Transponder Trail Trace Identifier Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
-
Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G170 Provision the ADM-10G Card Peer Group, Ethernet Settings, Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the ADM-10G card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 To provision a peer group, complete the G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group.
Step 4 To provision Ethernet settings, complete the G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings.
Step 5 To change line settings, complete the following tasks as needed:
Step 6 To change thresholds, complete the following tasks as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G403 Create the ADM-10G Peer Group
Note You cannot perform this task on a single ADM-10G card; it is only available if a second ADM-10G card can be accessed through the interlink ports (Port 17 and Port 18).
Note Due to a hardware limitation, you cannot provision the SDCC/LDCC on Port 17.
Note Perform this task on only one of the two peer cards.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 3 In the ADM Group Peer drop-down list, choose the slot number (for example, 14) where the companion ADM-10G card is located.
Step 4 In the ADM Peer Group field, enter a group name.
Step 5 Click Apply.
Note The Card Parameters Tunable Wavelengths area is read-only and does not contain any wavelengths until circuits are separately provisioned for the card.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G469 Provision the ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the Ethernet settings for the ADM-10G card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Ethernet
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in
Table 6-33
. The parameters that appear depend on the card mode.
Table 6-33 ADM-10G Card Ethernet Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) The Port number (
n
-
n
) and rate.
|
—
|
MTU
|
The maximum size of the Ethernet frames accepted by the port.
|
Jumbo. Default: 64 to 9216
Numeric: 1548
|
Mode
|
Sets the Ethernet mode.
|
1000 Mbps
|
Framing
|
Sets the framing type.
|
|
CRC Encap
|
Sets the CRC encap values for the framing
type.
|
CRC encap value for GFP-F:
CRC encap value for HDLC:
|
AINS Soak
|
Automatic in-service soak time. The duration of time that must pass with an uninterrupted signal before the traffic/termination transitions to the IS-NR (ANSI) or unlocked-enabled (ETSI) service state.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G397 Change the ADM-10G Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Ports tabs
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-34
as needed.
Note In Table 6-34, some parameter tabs do not always apply to all ADM-10G cards. If a tab does not apply, it will not appear in CTC.
Table 6-34 ADM-10G Line Port Tab Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
-
1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
-
17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
-
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
-
19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
-
1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
-
17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
-
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
-
19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS
-
IS,AINS
-
OOS,DSBLD
-
OOS,MT
|
-
Unlocked
-
Unlocked,automaticInService
-
Locked,disabled
-
Locked,maintenance
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR
-
OOS-AU,AINS
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD
-
OOS-MA,MT
|
-
Unlocked-enabled
-
Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
-
Locked-enabled,disabled
-
Locked-enabled,maintenance
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: (Not applicable for Gigabit Ethernet client interfaces) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: (Not applicable for Gigabit Ethernet client interfaces) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports.
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
Wavelength
|
Tunable wavelength.
|
Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths
. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-8 are supported wavelengths.
|
Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths
. For example, 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-8 are supported wavelengths.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Click the
Provisioning > Line > SONET or SDH
tabs.
Step 6 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-35
as needed.
Table 6-35 ADM-10G Line SONET or SDH Tab Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the client and trunk port number.
|
-
1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
-
17-1 (OC192)
-
18-1 (OC192/Interlink)
-
19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
-
1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
-
17-1(STM64)
-
18-1 (STM64/Interlink)
-
19-1 (STM64
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
ProvidesSync
|
When checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
|
Send DoNotUse
|
When checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
|
Type
|
(Display only) Type of node.
|
|
|
Admin SSM In
|
Overrides the synchronization status message (SSM) synchronization traceability unknown (STU) value. If the node does not receive an SSM signal, it defaults to STU.
|
• PRS—Primary Reference Source (Stratum 1)
• ST2—Stratum 2
• TNC—Transit node clock
• ST3E—Stratum 3E
• ST3—Stratum 3
• SMC—SONET minimum clock
• ST4—Stratum 4
• DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization
• RES—Reserved; quality level set by user
|
• G811—Primary reference clock
• STU—Sync traceability unknown
• G812T—Transit node clock traceable
• G812L—Local node clock traceable
• SETS—Synchronous equipment
• DUS—Do not use for timing synchronization
|
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G398 Change the ADM-10G Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line section trace settings for the ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab is available for ports configured as OC-N (Ports 1 through 16, Ports 17 and 18 [only in a single-card configuration] and Port 19). Section trace is not available on interlink ports.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the section trace settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Section Trace
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-36
.
Table 6-36 ADM-10G Section Trace Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
-
1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
-
17-1 (OC 192)
-
18-1 (OC192)
-
19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
-
1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
-
17-1 (STM64)
-
18-1 (STM64)
-
19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
|
|
Current
|
Current Transmit String displays the current transmit string; New Transmit String sets a new transmit string. Current String Type allows you to choose between ASCII or Hexadecimal format. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Current Received String displays the current received string. You can click
Refresh
to manually refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec
check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G399 Change the ADM-10G Line Thresholds for SONET and SDH Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for ADM-10G cards carrying SONET payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line threshold settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds
> SONET or SDH Thresholds tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-37
.
Table 6-37 ADM-10G Card Line Threshold Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
-
1-1 to 1-16 (OC3/OC12/OC48/GE)
-
17-1 (OC 192)
-
18-1 (OC192)
-
19-1 (OC192)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support OC192 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
-
1-1 to 1-16 (STM1/STM4/STM16/GE)
-
17-1 (STM 64)
-
18-1 (STM64)
-
19-1 (STM64)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports that support STM64 payload in a single-card configuration. These ports are interlink ports in a double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
(Line Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
PSC
|
Protection Switching Count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
PSD
|
Protection Switching Duration
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G412 Change the ADM-10G Line RMON Thresholds for the 1G Ethernet Payload
Purpose
|
This task changes the line RMON threshold settings for an ADM-10G card carrying the 1G Ethernet payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
G411 Provision an ADM-10G PPM and Port
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task can only be performed if the ADM-10G card has at least one PPM port provisioned for Gigabit Ethernet.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the line RMON thresholds. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose the applicable Ethernet variable. See
Table 6-38
for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-38 ADM-10G Gigabit Ethernet Thresholds
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifOutOctets
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
Number of multicast frames received error-free.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to a higher layer or sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
|
ifInErrorBytePkts
|
Number of receive error bytes.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
Number of frames with frame check errors; that is, there is an integral number of octets, but there is also an incorrect frame check sequence (FCS).
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
|
Number of received frames that were larger than the permitted maximum size.
|
dot3ControlInUnknownOpcodes
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode not supported by this device.
|
dot3InPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
dot3OutPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were well-formed and less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsFragments
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
Note It is normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 65 and 127 octets in length, inclusive.
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 256 and 511 octets in length, inclusive.
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length, inclusive, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the interface that were directed to the broadcast address.
Note Multicast packets are not included.
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
Total number of good packets transmitted and received by the interface that were directed to a multicast address.
Note This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
Total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface that were well-formed and longer than 1518 octets, excluding framing bits and including FCS octets.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits and including FCS octets), and had a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (alignment error).
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmit packets.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list,
choose either
Relative
or
Absolute
. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click
OK
.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G400 Provision the ADM-10G Interlink or Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the ADM-10G interlink or trunk port alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the interlink or trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click
Refresh
.
Step 4 Referring to
Table 6-39
, verify the interlink or trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter
.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-39 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
|
|
|
|
|
17-1 and 18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 and Port 18 are trunk ports in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
–7.0 dBm
|
–27.0 dBm
|
6.0 dBm
|
–4.0 dBm
|
19-1 (Trunk)
|
–7.0 dBm
|
–27.0 dBm
|
6.0 dBm
|
–4.0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 7 Referring to
Table 6-40
, verify the interlink or trunk port alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter
.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-40 ADM-10G Interlink and Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
|
|
|
|
|
17-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 17 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
1.0 dBm
|
–13.0 dBm
|
1.0 dBm
|
–8.0 dBm
|
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
–5.0 dBm
|
–30.0 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
–3.0 dBm
|
19-1 (Trunk)
|
–5.0 dBm
|
–30.0 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
–3.0 dBm
|
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G401 Provision the ADM-10G Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the ADM-10G card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the
TCA
radio button is checked. If not, check it, then click
Refresh
.
Step 4 Referring to Table 6-13 and Table 6-14, verify the Port 1 to 16 (Client) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter
.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 7 Referring to
Table 6-13
and Table 6-14, verify the interlink ports 17-1 and 18-1 for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low settings. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and pressing
Enter
.
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G402 Change the ADM-10G OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for the ADM-10G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the ADM-10G card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > OTN
tabs, then click one of the following subtabs:
OTN Lines
, ITU-T
G.709 Thresholds
,
FEC Thresholds
, or
Trail Trace Identifier
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables
6-41
through
6-44
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio buttons and click Refresh.
Table 6-41
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-41 ADM-10G Card OTN Lines Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
-
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
-
19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
ITU-TG.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled, Enabled, or, for the TXP_MR_10E, Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. For TXP_MR_10E cards, Standard is the same as enabling FEC.
|
-
Disable—FEC is off.
-
Standard—Standard FEC is on.
-
Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
Synch Mapping
|
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
Synch mapping
|
Table 6-42
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-42 ADM-10G Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
-
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
-
19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
ES
|
Errored seconds. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Table 6-43
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-43 ADM-10G Card FEC Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
-
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
-
19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or 1 day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or 1 day intervals.
|
Table 6-44
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-44 ADM-10GTrail Trace Identifier Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
-
18-1 (Trunk/Interlink)
-
19-1 (Trunk)
Note Port 18 is a trunk port in single-card configuration and an interlink port in double-card configuration (ADM-10G peer group).
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section/Path overhead alarm arises because of a J0/J1 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
-
Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Current Transmit String displays the current transmit string; New sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Current Expected String displays the current expected string; New sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String Type, click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Current Received String displays the current received string. You can click
Refresh
to manually refresh this display, or check the
Auto-refresh every 5 sec
check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh (every 5 sec)
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G333 Add an ADM-10G card to an Existing Topology
Purpose
|
This procedure adds an ADM-10G card to an existing topology. Perform the steps in this procedure when OCHNC and DCC are present in the network. In case of OCH trails, delete all the circuits in Step 3 that traverses the port before deleting the OCH-trail.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
-
G46 Log into CTC.
-
Complete the turn up procedures in Turn Up a Node for the node to be added.
-
An updated Cisco Transport Planner network plan recalculated with the new node.
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 If path protected circuits exist between Node A and Node B, complete the
DLP-A197 Initiate a Path Protection Force Switch
task. This task applies a force switch on the path between Node A and Node B.
Step 2 Complete the G129 Add a DWDM Node task to add Node C.
Step 3 Complete the G106 Delete Optical Channel Network Connections task to delete OCHNC circuit between Node A and Node B.
Step 4 Complete the G59 Create, Delete, and Manage Optical Channel Network Connections, task to create OCHNC circuit between Node A-->Node C and Node C-->Node B for wavelength connectivity.
Note The ports on the card in Node C must be tuned to the same wavelength as Node A and Node B.
Step 5 Create DCC terminations on Node C. See the
DLP-A377 Provision Section DCC Terminations
task.
Alternatively, if additional bandwidth is needed for CTC management, complete the
DLP-A378 Provision Line DCC Terminations
task.
Step 6 Ensure that the DCCs are functional between Node A-->Node C and Node C-->Node B. See the G76 Provision DCC/GCC Terminations task.
Step 7 Complete the G200 Create, Delete, and Manage STS or VC Circuits for the ADM-10G Card to create pass-through STS or VC circuits in Node C.
Step 8 Complete the
NTP-A301 Merge Circuits
task for each circuit created.
Step 9 If path protected circuits exist between Node A and Node B, complete the
DLP-A198 Clear a Path Protection Force Switch
task. This task clears a force switch on the path between Node A and Node B.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G97 Modify the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the line and threshold settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards.
G63 Install an SFP or XFP
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM (if necessary)
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate (if necessary)
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Step 4 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G222 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards, including payload type, termination mode, and wavelength.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-45
.
Note Parameters shown in Table 6-45 do not apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the parameter or option does not apply, it is not shown in CTC.
Table 6-45 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Settings
|
|
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation. Options that do not apply to a card do not display.
The MXP_2.5G_10G card is based on SONET/SDH multiplexing. The transparent mode terminates and rebuilds the B1 byte (as well as other bytes) of the incoming OC-48/STM-16 signal. The B2 byte is not touched.
The MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards are fully transparent in transparent mode based on the OTN/ITU-T G.709 multiplexing scheme. It does not terminate the B1 byte or other bytes.
It encapsulates OC-48/STM-16 bytes into ODU1 first, then multiplexes them into an OTU2.
Refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
for more details.
|
For ANSI platforms:
-
Transparent
-
Section (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
-
Line (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
For ETSI platforms:
-
Transparent
-
Multiplex Section (MXP_2.5G_10G, only)
-
Regeneration Section (MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only)
|
AIS/Squelch
|
(MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C only) Sets the transparent termination mode configuration.
|
|
Tunable Wavelengths
|
(Display only) Shows the supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. For the MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards, the first and last supported wavelength, frequency spacing, and number of supported wavelengths are shown in the format:
first wavelength-last wavelength-frequency spacing-number of supported wavelengths
. For example, the MXP_2.5G_10E_C card would show: 1529.55nm-1561.83nm-50gHz-82. The MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E show the four wavelengths supported by the card that is installed.
|
—
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G223 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > SONET
(ANSI) or
SDH
(ETSI) tabs.
Note The SONET tab appears only if you have created a PPM for a given port.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-46
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-46 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports (OC-48/STM-16). Port 5 is the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength services. Client ports will not appear of the pluggable port module is not provisioned for it.
|
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5 (Trunk) (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a logical name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
-
IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
-
Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
Sets the optical transport type.
|
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
|
Checked or unchecked
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference. (This parameter does not appear for the MXP_2.5G_10E trunk port.)
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
Options: ANSI/ETSI
-
Autoprovision/Autoprovision (default)
-
SR
-
SR 1/I-1—Short reach up to 2-km distance
-
IR 1/S1—Intermediate reach, up to 15-km distance
-
IR 2/S2—Intermediate reach up to 40-km distance
-
LR 1/L1—long reach, up to 40-km distance
-
LR 2/L2—long reach, up to 80-km distance
-
LR 3/L3—long reach, up to 80-km distance
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing CWDM spacing
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G224 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Section Trace tab appears only if you have created a PPM for the card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Section Trace
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-47
.
Table 6-47 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Section Trace Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5 (Trunk; MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size. Select either radio button.
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G225 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the trunk settings for the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This task does not apply to the MXP_2.5G_10G card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Trunk
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-48
.
Table 6-48 MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Trunk Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number. Port 5 is the DWDM trunk (OC-192/STM-64) that provides wavelength services.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a logical name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
-
IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
(OC-N and STM-N payloads only) Sets the automatic in-service soak period.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G369 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-49
.
Table 6-49 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
(Display only) Indicates the wavelength band available from the card that is installed. If the card is preprovisioned, the field can be provisioned to the band of the card that will be installed.
|
-
C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
-
L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning for MXP_2.5G_10E_C and MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. (This field does not apply to MXP_2.5G_10G or MXP_2.5G_10E cards.)
|
-
Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
-
Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T C-band or L-band spacing, depending on the card that is installed. For MXP_2.5G_10G and MXP_2.5G_10E cards, the wavelengths carried by the card are identified with two asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G226 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder SONET/SDH Line Thresholds Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET (ANSI) or SDH (ETSI) line threshold settings for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-50
.
Note In Table 6-50, some parameter tabs or selections do not always apply to all 4x2.5G muxponder cards. If the tabs or selections do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-50 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line Threshold Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5 (MXP_2.5G_10G only)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G303 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Select
TCA
(if not already selected), a 15 Min or 1 Day PM interval radio button and then click
Refresh
.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 4 Referring to
Table 6-51
, verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-51 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port TCA Thresholds
|
|
|
|
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
|
–8 dBm
|
–18 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
–1 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E
|
–9 dBm
|
–18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
|
–9 dBm
|
–18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
|
–9 dBm
|
–18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
|
–9 dBm
|
–18 dBm
|
9 dBm
|
0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 7 Referring to
Table 6-52
, verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-52 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trunk Port Alarm Thresholds
|
|
|
|
|
MXP_2.5G_10G
|
–8 dBm
|
–20 dBm
|
4 dBm
|
2 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E
|
–8 dBm
|
–20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_C
|
–8 dBm
|
–20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10E_L
|
–8 dBm
|
–20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
MXP_2.5G_10EX_C
|
–8 dBm
|
–20 dBm
|
7 dBm
|
3 dBm
|
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G304 Provision the 4x2.5G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to
Table 6-53
, verify the client Port
N
(where
N
= 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-53 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
|
|
|
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
–3
|
–18
|
3
|
–16
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
0
|
–18
|
6
|
–11
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
–3
|
–18
|
3
|
–16
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
0
|
–18
|
6
|
–11
|
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to provision each additional client port.
Step 5 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 6 Referring to
Table 6-54
, verify the client Port
N
(where
N
= 1 through 4) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-54 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L Card Client Interfaces Alarm Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module
(SFP)
|
|
|
|
|
OC-48
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
0
|
–21
|
0
|
–13
|
15454-SFP-OC48-IR
|
3
|
–21
|
3
|
–8
|
STM-16
|
ONS-SE-2G-S1
|
0
|
–21
|
0
|
–13
|
15454E-SFP-L.16.1
|
3
|
–21
|
3
|
–8
|
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
Step 8 Repeat Steps
6
and
7
to provision each additional client port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G228 Change the 4x2.5G Muxponder Line OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line OTN settings for MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, and MXP_2.5G_10EX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C card where you want to change the line OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > OTN
tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs:
OTN Lines
,
OTN G.709 Thresholds
,
FEC Thresholds
, or
Trail Trace Identifier
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables
6-55
through
6-58
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-55
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Note In Table 6-55, some parameter tabs or values do not always apply to all MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, or MXP_2.5G_10E_L cards. If the tabs or values do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-55 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Card Line OTN Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN line FEC mode. FEC mode can be Disabled or Enabled. With the MXP_2.5G_10E card, Enhanced FEC (E-FEC) mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate. E-FEC applies only to the MXP_2.5G_10E card.
|
-
Enable—(MXP_2.5G_10G only) FEC is on.
-
Disable—FEC is off.
-
Standard—(MXP_2.5G_10E only) FEC is on.
-
Enhanced—(MXP_2.5G_10E only) Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
(MXP_2.5G_10E only) The MXP_2.5G_10E can perform standard ODU multiplexing according to ITU-T G.709. The card uses this to aggregate the four OC-48 client signals.
|
|
Table 6-56
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-56 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
5 (Trunk)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Table 6-57
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds tab.
Table 6-57 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C FEC Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the interval selected. The interval can be set for 15 minutes or one day.
|
Numeric
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words during the interval selected. The interval can be set for 15 minutes or one day.
|
Numeric
|
Table 6-58
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-58 MXP_2.5G_10G, MXP_2.5G_10E, MXP_2.5G_10E_C, MXP_2.5G_10E_L, or MXP_2.5G_10EX_C Trail Trace Identifier Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
Sets the port number. The trail trace identifier is applicable only to the trunk interface, which handles ITU-T G.709 frames.
|
5 (Trunk)
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
-
Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G99 Modify the 2.5G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see Chapter10, “Manage Alarms”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G236 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the client line settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Client
tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in
Table 6-59
.
Table 6-59 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
-
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: (MXP_MR_2.5G only) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the card:
-
Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on the hardware.
-
SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating wavelength range is 770-860 nm.
-
LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is 1270-1355 nm.
-
CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a maximum length of 25 meters.
-
T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable for a maximum length of 100 meters.
-
DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1430-1580 nm.
-
HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1280-1335 nm.
-
ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
-
VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths:850 nm through 1560.61 nm; 100-GHz ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G237 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the distance extension settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Distance extension settings can be changed only if the facilities are out of service (OOS,DSBLD).
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk ports (Port 9 for MXP_MR_2.5G card or Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line
>
Client
tabs. A client port must be provisioned for the tab to be present.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
Step 3 Locate the Client port table row and verify that the Service State column value is OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI). If yes, continue with Step 4. If not, complete the following substeps:
a. Click the
Admin State
table cell and choose
OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or
Locked,Maintenance
(ETSI).
b. Click
Apply
, then
Yes
.
Step 4 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension
tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 5 Modify any of the settings for the Distance Extension tab as described in
Table 6-60
.
Table 6-60 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Distance Extension Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
|
Enable Distance Extension
|
Allows end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled, set the connected Fibre Channel switches to Interop or Open Fabric mode, depending on the Fibre Channel switch. By default, the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G card will interoperate with the Cisco Multilayer Director Switch (MDS) storage products.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Auto Detect Credits
|
Allows automatic detection of buffer credits for Fibre Channel flow control.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Credits Available
|
(Display only) Displays the number of buffer credits available.
|
Numeric (range depends on the client equipment attached to the card)
|
Autoadjust GFP Buffer Threshold
|
Allows the threshold of the generic framing procedure (GFP) buffer between two MXP_MR_2.5G or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards to be automatically adjusted.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
GFP Buffers Available
|
Displays the number of GFP buffers available between two MXP_MR_2.5G or two MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Numeric
|
Step 6 Click
Apply
.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G238 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET (OC-48) or SDH (STM-16) settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note SONET (OC-48)/SDH (STM-16) settings apply only to the trunk ports (Port 9 for the MXP_MR_2.5G card and Ports 9 and 10 for the MXPP_MR_2.5G card.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the OC-48/STM-64 settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > SONET
(ANSI) or
SDH
(ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the SONET or SDH tab as described in
Table 6-61
.
Table 6-61 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (trunk for MXP_MR_2.5G) or 9 and 10 (trunks for MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
-
IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
1
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
-
Disable (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Type
|
The optical transport type.
|
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a DUS message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as an NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G239 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Section Trace
tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in
Table 6-62
.
Table 6-62 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Section Trace Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
-
9 (trunk port for MXP_MR_2.5G)
-
9 and 10 (trunk ports for MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the received trace mode.
|
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If an TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G370 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in
Table 6-63
.
Table 6-63 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
10 (Trunk) (MXPP_MR_2.5G only)
|
Band
|
(Display only) Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned.
|
C—Only the C band is available
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning. This field does not apply to MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G cards
|
—
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU-T, C-band spacing. If the card is installed, the wavelengths it carries are identified with two asterisks. Other wavelengths have a dark grey background. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G240 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds
(ANSI) or
SDH Thresholds
(ETSI)
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in
Table 6-64
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 6-64, some parameters or options do not apply to all MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G cards. If the parameters or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-64 MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Line Threshold Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
-
9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
-
9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
-
9 (MXP_MR_2.5G)
-
9 and 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G)
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SEFS
|
(Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Section only
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Regeneration Section (only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G321 Change the 2.5G Data Muxponder Line Thresholds for 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10G and MXPP_MR_2.5G transponder cards carrying the 1G Ethernet or 1G FC/FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Display the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See
Table 6-65
for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-65 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR 2.5G Card 1G Ethernet or 1G, 2G FC/FICON Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInDiscards
|
Number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutDiscards
|
Number of outbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of high-level data link control (HDLC) and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the maximum transmission unit (MTU). This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSets
|
Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
8b10bStatsEncodingDispErrors
|
Number of 8b10b disparity violations on the Fibre Channel line side.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list,
choose either
Relative
or
Absolute
. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click
OK
.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G307 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Throughout this task, trunk port refers to Port 9 (MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G) and Port 10 (MXPP_MR_2.5G only).
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 3 Verify the trunk port TCA thresholds for RX Power High is –9 dBm and for RX Power Low is –23 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Step 4 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 5 Verify the trunk port Alarm thresholds for RX Power High is –7 dBm and for RX Power Low is –26 dBm. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Step 6 Click
Apply
.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G308 Provision the 2.5G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_2.5G or MXPP_MR_2.5G card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to
Table 6-66
, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-66 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–17
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–15
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–17
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–17
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–17
|
0
|
–16
|
3
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–20
|
–3
|
–16
|
3
|
ESCON
|
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
–21
|
–14
|
–32
|
–11
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Repeat Steps
3
and
4
to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 7 Referring to
Table 6-67
, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Table 6-67 MXP_MR_2.5G and MXPP_MR_2.5G Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–18
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
ONE_GE
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
ESCON
|
ONS-SE-200-MM
|
–24
|
–11
|
–35
|
–8
|
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Repeat Steps
7
and
8
to provision each additional client port. When you have finished provisioning client ports, continue with Step 10.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G148 Modify the 10G Data Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see Chapter10, “Manage Alarms”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G333 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Client Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Client
tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Client tab as described in
Table 6-68
.
Table 6-68 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Client Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
1 through 8
|
Port Name
|
The user can assign a logical name for each of the ports shown by filling in this field.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
Note You can provision a string (port name) for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C cards, which allows the MDS Fabric Manager to create a link association between that SAN port and a SAN port on a Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
-
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
Reach
|
Sets the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
The reach distances that appear in the drop-down list depend on the card:
-
Autoprovision—The system to automatically provision the reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on the hardware.
-
SX—Short laser wavelength on multimode fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 550 meters. The operating wavelength range is 770-860 nm.)
-
LX—Long wavelength for a long haul fiber optic cable for a maximum length of 10 km. The operating wavelength range is 1270-1355 nm.)
-
CX—Two pairs of 150-ohm shielded twisted pair cable for a maximum length of 25 meters.)
-
T—Four pairs of Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair cable for a maximum length of 100 meters.)
-
DX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1430-1580 nm.)
-
HX—Single mode up to 40 km. The operating wavelength range is 1280-1335 nm.)
-
ZX—Extended wavelength single-mode optical fiber for up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
-
VX—Single mode up to 100 km. The operating wavelength range is 1500-1580 nm.)
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client port.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths:
850 nm through 1560.61 nm
100-GHz ITU spacing
CWDM spacing
|
Squelch
|
Shuts down the far-end laser in response to certain defects. (Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT payloads.)
|
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G334 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Distance Extension Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the distance extension settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, and MXP_MR_10DMEX_C muxponder card ports provisioned for Fibre Channel or FICON payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The distance extension parameters only apply to client ports (Ports 1 to 8) and not to the trunk port (Port 9).
Note The client port must be in the OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state in order to change the distance extension settings. If a Y-cable is provisioned on the client port, both the working and protect client ports must be in OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI) state before you change the distance extension settings.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to change the distance extension settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Distance Extension
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in
Table 6-69
.
Table 6-69 MXP_MR_10DME_C, MXP_MR_10DME_L, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C Card Line Distance Extension Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number. Up to eight ports might appear based on the number of pluggable port modules that are provisioned.
|
—
|
Enable Distance Extension
|
Allows end-to-end distances of up to 1600 km for FC1G and up to 800 km for FC2G. If Distance Extension is enabled, set the connected Fibre Channel switches to Interop or Open Fabric mode, depending on the Fibre Channel switch. By default, the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card will interoperate with the Cisco MDS storage products.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Fast Switch
|
If unchecked, the end-to-end fiber channel link is reinitialized every time a Y-cable protection switch occurs. If checked, reinitialization of the link is avoided when a Y-cable protection switch occurs, thus reducing the traffic hit considerably.
This feature is supported for FC1G, FC2G, FC4G, FICON1G, FICON2G, and FICON4G trunk failures as well as user-initiated Y-cable protection switch such as, Manual, Force, or Lockout. It is recommended that you do not enable the Fast Switch option as the link may not come up after a Y-cable protection switch in certain cases.
Note This option can be used only if you have unchecked Enable Distance Extension option.
|
Checked or unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G340 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Wavelength Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the trunk wavelength settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk wavelength settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Wavelength Trunk Settings
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Wavelength Trunk Settings tab as described in
Table 6-70
.
Table 6-70 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Wavelength Trunk Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
Port 9 (Trunk)
|
Band
|
Indicates the wavelength band that can be provisioned. The field is display-only when a physical MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L is installed. If the card is provisioned in CTC only, you can provision the band for the card that will be installed.
|
-
C—The C-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
-
L—The L-band wavelengths are available in the Wavelength field.
|
Even/Odd
|
Sets the wavelengths available for provisioning.
|
-
Even—Displays even C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
-
Odd—Displays odd C-band or L-band wavelengths in the Wavelength field.
|
Wavelength
|
The wavelength provisioned for the trunk.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths in 100-GHz ITU spacing
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G335 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OC-192 (ANSI)/STM-64 (ETSI) settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > SONET
(ANSI) or
SDH
(ETSI). Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in
Table 6-71
.
Table 6-71 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
-
IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
1
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
Type
|
The optical transport type.
|
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled or can be set for one of three mode options.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
ProvidesSync
|
Sets the ProvidesSync card parameter. If checked, the card is provisioned as a NE timing reference.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G336 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Section Trace
tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings in the Section Trace tab as described in
Table 6-72
.
Table 6-72 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Line Section Trace Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the received trace mode.
|
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If a TIM on section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or select the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G341 Change the 10G Data Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L muxponder cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds
(ANSI) or
SDH Thresholds
(ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as shown in
Table 6-73
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently; 15 Min and 1 Day independently; and Line and Section independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note In Table 6-73, some parameters and options do not apply to all MXP_MR_10DME cards. If the parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-73 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_LCard Line Threshold Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
|
|
EB
|
Path Errored Block indicates that one or more bits are in error within a block
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SEFS
|
(Near End Section or Regeneration Section only) Severely errored framing seconds
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
—
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G337 Change the 10G Data Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 1G FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards carrying Ethernet, FC/FICON, or ISC/ISC3 payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1 (ONE_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet, FC, FICON, or ISC variable. See
Table 6-74
for a list of available Ethernet variables,
Table 6-75
for a list of FC and FICON variables,
Table 6-76
for a list of ISC and ISC3 variables, and
Table 6-77
for a list of GFP variables.
Table 6-74 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L Ethernet Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSum
|
Number of code violations/running disparity errors in the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
|
Table 6-75 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L FC/FICON Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutOversizePkts
|
Total number of oversized packets output from the interface.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
fcStatsZeroTxCredits
|
This is a count that increments when the FC/FICON Tx credits go from a non-zero value to zero.
|
fcStatsRxRecvrReady
|
Number of received RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
|
fcStatsTxRecvrReady
|
Number of transmitted RDY (Receive Ready) order set.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSum
|
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
|
Table 6-76 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L ISC and ISC3Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
8b10bInvalidOrderedSetsDispErrorsSum
|
Number of Code Violations/Running Disparity errors in the 8b/10b encoded characters received.
|
Table 6-77 MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L GFP RMON Variables
|
|
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors
|
Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with single bit errors in the core header (these errors are correctable).
|
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid
|
Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
|
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors
|
Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel data.
|
gfpStatsCSFRaised
|
Number of Rx client management frames with Client Signal Fail indication.
|
gfpStatsLFDRaised
|
The number of Core HEC CRC Multiple Bit Errors.
Note This count is only for cHEC multiple bit error when in frame. It is a count of when the state machine goes out of frame.
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list,
choose either
Relative
or
Absolute
. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click
OK
.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G338 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click
TCA
and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and press
Enter
.
-
RX Power High: –9 dBm
-
RX Power Low: –18 dBm
-
TX Power High: 9 dBm
-
TX Power Low: 0 dBm
Step 5 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 9) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and press
Enter
.
-
RX Power High: –8 dBm
-
RX Power Low: –20 dBm
-
TX Power High: 7 dBm
-
TX Power Low: 3 dBm
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G339 Provision the 10G Data Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 Referring to
Table 6-78
, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 8) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Table 6-78 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
–17
|
3
|
–16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–3
|
–20
|
3
|
–16
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
–15
|
3
|
–16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–3
|
–20
|
3
|
–16
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
–17
|
3
|
–16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–3
|
–20
|
3
|
–16
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
–17
|
3
|
–16
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–3
|
–20
|
3
|
–16
|
ISC3 PEER 1G
ISC3 PEER 2G
|
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
0
|
–17
|
3
|
–16
|
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
0
|
–20
|
3
|
–16
|
FC4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
0
|
–12
|
4
|
–15
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
–1
|
–15
|
4
|
–15
|
FICON4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
0
|
–12
|
4
|
–15
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
–1
|
–15
|
4
|
–15
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Repeat Steps
3
and
4
to provision each additional client port.
Step 6 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 7 Referring to
Table 6-79
, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Table 6-79 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Client Interface Alarm
Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
FC1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
FC2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–18
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
FICON1G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
FICON2G
|
15454-SFP-GEFC-SX
15454E-SFP-GEFC-S
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
15454-SFP-GE+-LX
15454E-SFP-GE+-LX
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
ISC3 PEER 1G
ISC3 PEER 2G
|
ONS-SE-G2F-SX
|
–20
|
3
|
–13
|
–1
|
ONS-SE-G2F-LX
|
–23
|
0
|
–13
|
0
|
FC4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
–15
|
3
|
–11
|
–1
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
–18
|
2
|
–11
|
0
|
FICON4G
|
ONS-SE-4G-MM
|
–15
|
3
|
–11
|
–1
|
ONS-SE-4G-SM
|
–18
|
2
|
–11
|
0
|
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Repeat Steps
7
and
8
to provision each additional client port.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G366 Change the 10G Data Muxponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTN settings for the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > OTN
tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs:
OTN Lines
,
G.709 Thresholds
,
FEC Thresholds
, or
Trail Trace Identifier
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables
6-80
through
6-83
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-80
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-80 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card OTN Line Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
Asynch/Synch Mapping
|
Sets how the ODUk (client payload) is mapped to the optical channel (OTUk).
|
-
Asynch mapping
-
Synch mapping
|
Table 6-81
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-81 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
9 (Trunk)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
Table 6-82
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-82 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card FEC Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
2
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-83
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-83 MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L Card Trail Trace Identifier
Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
2
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
-
Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G293 Modify the 40G Muxponder Card Line Settings and PM Parameter Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the muxponder card settings. If you are already logged in, proceed to Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the G103 Back Up the Database to save the existing settings before modifying.
Step 3 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see Chapter10, “Manage Alarms”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G662 Change the 40G Multirate Muxponder Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the 40G-MXP-C card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 3 Modify either of the settings described in
Table 6-84
.
Table 6-84 40G-MXP-C Card Settings
|
|
|
|
Card Mode
|
Sets the card mode.
|
-
Muxponder
-
Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to Unidirectional Regen under the following conditions:
– Trunk port is in OOS,DSBLD state.
– Pluggable port modules of the card must not be configured for payload.
– Regeneration peer slot must be set to None.
|
-
Muxponder
-
Unidirectional Regen
Set the mode to Unidirectional Regen under the following conditions:
– Trunk port is in locked,disabled state.
– Pluggable port modules of the card must not be configured for payload.
– Regeneration peer slot must be set to None.
|
Trunk Wavelengths
|
(Display only) Shows supported wavelengths of the trunk port after the card is installed. 40G-MXP-C show the C-band wavelengths supported by the card that is installed.
|
—
|
—
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G666 Change the 40G Muxponder Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Ports
tabs. Tabs and parameters vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in
Table 6-85
.
Table 6-85 40G-MXP-C Card Line Client Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
-
1 through 4 (client)
-
5 (trunk)
|
Port Name
|
A logical name for each of the port. This field is blank by default.
|
Type up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters.
For details, see the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
Note You can assign a port name for each fiber channel/FICON interface on the 40G-MXP-C card, enabling the MDS Fabric Manager to associate the SAN port and a SAN port on the Cisco MDS 9000 switch.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state unless network conditions prevent the change. For more information, see Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS (ANSI) or Unlocked (ETSI)
-
OOS,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS,MT (ANSI) or Locked,maintenance (ETSI)
-
IS,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked,automaticInService (ETSI)
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Shows the general condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, see Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR (ANSI) or Unlocked-enabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-AU,AINS (ANSI) or Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,disabled (ETSI)
-
OOS-MA,MT (ANSI) or Locked-enabled,maintenance (ETSI)
|
ALS Mode
|
(client ports only) Activates the ALS mode.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down during LOS.
-
Auto Restart: (OC-192/STM-64 only) ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down during LOS. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down during LOS. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
Reach
|
Sets the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
-
Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the reach from the pluggable port module (PPM) reach value on the hardware.
-
EW
-
LW
-
SW
-
LRM
-
ER
-
LR
-
SR
-
ZR
-
IR 2
-
LR 2
-
DWDM
-
CWDM40km
|
Wavelength
|
Provisions the port wavelength.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Squelch
|
Shuts down the far-end laser in response to certain defects.
|
-
Squelch (Squelch does not apply to ISC COMPACT payloads.)
-
Disable
|
Overclock
|
(trunk port only) Enables or disables overclock mode on the trunk port.
|
|
Rx Wavelength
|
(trunk port only) Provisions the trunk port wavelength.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths:
Further wavelengths in the 100-GHz ITU-T C-band spacing. The card wavelengths are marked by asterisks. If the card is not installed, all wavelengths appear with a dark grey background.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G667 Change the 40G Muxponder Line SONET (OC-192) or SDH (STM-64), or Ethernet Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line SONET OC-192 or SDH STM-64, or ethernet line settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the SONET (OC-192)/SDH (STM-64) settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > SONET
(ANSI) or
SDH
(ETSI). Tabs and parameters vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 To modify the line SONET or SDH settings, see
Table 6-86
. To modify the ethernet line settings see
Table 6-87
.
Table 6-86 40G-MXP-C Card Line SONET or SDH Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
1 through 4 (client)
|
Port Name
|
A logical name assigned to a port. This field is blank by default.
|
Type up to 32 alphanumeric/ special characters. Blank by default.
For details, see the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
ProvidesSync
|
(Display only) Displays the ProvidesSync card parameter state.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
SyncMsgIn
|
Sets the EnableSync card parameter. Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte), which allow the node to choose the best timing source.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Send DoNotUse
|
Sets the Send DoNotUse card state. When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on the S1 byte.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Type
|
The optical transport type.
|
|
Termination Mode
|
(Display-only for Standard Regeneration and Enhanced FEC card configurations) Sets the mode of operation.
|
-
Transparent
-
Section (ANSI) or Regeneration Section (RS) (ETSI)
-
Line (ANSI) or Multiplex Section (MS) (ETSI)
|
Table 6-87 Ethernet Line Settings of the 40G-MXP-C Card
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
1 through 4 (client)
|
1 through 4 (client)
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS
-
IS,AINS
-
OOS,DSBLD
-
OOS,MT
|
-
Unlocked
-
Unlocked,automaticInService
-
Locked,disabled
-
Locked,maintenance
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR
-
OOS-AU,AINS
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD
-
OOS-MA,MT
|
-
Unlocked-enabled
-
Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
-
Locked-enabled,disabled
-
Locked-enabled,maintenance
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
Note The AINS service state is not supported on interlink ports.
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client port.
|
-
Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the reach.
-
LR
-
LR2
-
SR
-
SR1
-
IR 1
-
ER
-
ZR
-
DWDM
-
CWDM40km
-
IR2
-
MM
|
-
Autoprovision—The system automatically provisions the reach.
-
LR
-
I1
-
I2
-
S2
-
ER
-
L1
-
L2
-
DWDM
-
MM
-
ZR
-
IR 1
-
CWDM40km
|
MTU
|
Displays the maximum size of the Ethernet frames accepted by the port.
|
|
|
Mapping Mode
|
Displays the mapping mechanism. Choose GFP framing (the default) or WIS framing. The framing type needs to match the framing type at the far end.
|
|
|
Enable Flow Control (Only when the framing type is WIS)
|
Enables/disables flow control messaging with its peer port. When enabled, the port can send and receive PAUSE frames when buffer congestion occurs. When disabled, no PAUSE frames are transmitted and the PAUSE frames received are discarded.
|
-
ON —Flow control is enabled.
-
OFF(default)—Flow control is disabled.
|
-
ON —Flow control is enabled.
-
OFF(default)—Flow control is disabled.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G668 Change the 40G Muxponder Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the section trace settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Section Trace
tabs. Tabs and parameter selections vary according to PPM provisioning.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-88
.
Table 6-88 40G-MXP-C Card Line Section Trace Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number, applicable for only OC192/STM64 payloads.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
Disables alarm indication signal.
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays and sets the current transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex Mode
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode). The supported range for 1 bit Hex TX trace is 20 to 7E. If TX trace is provisioned outside this range, client transmits 00.
|
Transmit string size
|
Expected
|
Displays and sets the current expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String Type, click
Hex Mode
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode).
|
Expected string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. Click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
Received string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
Automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
-
Checked
-
Unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G669 Change the 40G Muxponder SONET or SDH Line Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the SONET or SDH line threshold settings for the 40G-MXP-C muxponder card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > SONET Thresholds
(ANSI) or
SDH Thresholds
(ETSI) tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings shown in
Table 6-89
.
Note In Table 6-89, some parameters and options do not apply to all 40-G-MXP-C cards. If the parameter or options do not apply, they do not appear in CTC.
Table 6-89 40G-MXP-C Card Line Threshold Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
Applicable for only OC192/STM64 payloads.
|
|
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
—
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each category and click
Refresh
.
Click
Reset to Default
to restore default values.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each category and click
Refresh
.
Click
Reset to Default
to restore default values.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each category and click
Refresh
.
Click
Reset to Default
to restore default values.
|
—
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Line or Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each category and click
Refresh
.
Click
Reset to Default
to restore default values.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section (near end only)
Choose an option individually in each category and click
Refresh
.
Click
Reset to Default
to restore default values.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G670 Change the 40G Muxponder Line RMON Thresholds for Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for 40G-MXP-C card carrying Ethernet, 8G FC, or 10G FC payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the line threshold settings in card view.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port, either the payload port, for example “1-1 (TEN_GE)”, or the equivalent ITU-T G.7041 GFP (Generic Frame Procedure) port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet or FC variable. See
Table 6-90
for a list of available Ethernet variables,
Table 6-91
for a list of FC, and
Table 6-92
for a list of GFP variables.
Table 6-90 40G-MXP-C Ethernet Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInUcastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer.
|
inInMulticastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
|
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
|
dot3StatsInPauseFrames
|
A count of frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
dot3StatsOutPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
The total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsFragments
|
The total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral.
|
etherStatsPkts
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets,broadcast packets, and multicast packets) transmitted and received by the interface.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) transmitted and received by the interface that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
The total number of good packets transmitted and received by the interface that were directed to the broadcast address
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
The total number of good packets transmitted and received by the interface that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
The total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
The total number of packets transmitted and received by the interface that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and were not an integral number of octets in length or had a bad FCS.
|
etherStatsOctets
|
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted and received by the interface on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
Table 6-91 40G-MXP-C FC Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Number of bytes received since the last counter reset.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInErrors
|
Total number of receive errors.
|
ifOutOctets
|
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutErrors
|
Number of outbound packets or transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of frames received that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Number of received frames that exceed the MTU. This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of receive data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTooLong
|
Total number of transmitted data frames that are less than 5 bytes. This value is a part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesTruncated
|
Number of transmitted data frames that exceed the MTU. This value is part of HDLC and GFP port statistics.
|
Table 6-92 40G-MXP-C GFP RMON Variables
|
|
gfpStatsRxFrame
|
Total number of received data frames.
|
gfpStatsTxFrame
|
Total number of transmitted data frames.
|
gfpStatsRxSblkCRCErrors
|
Total number of superblock CRC errors with the receive transparent GFP frame. A transparent GFP frame has multiple superblocks which each contain Fibre Channel data.
|
gfpStatsRxOctets
|
Total number of GFP data octets received.
|
gfpStatsTxOctets
|
Total number of GFP data octets transmitted.
|
gfpStatsRxSBitErrors
|
Received generic framing protocol (GFP) frames with single bit errors in the core header (these errors are correctable).
|
gfpStatsRxMBitErrors
|
Received GFP frames with multiple bit errors in the core header (these errors are not correctable).
|
gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid
|
Received GFP frames with invalid type (these are discarded). For example, receiving GFP frames that contain Ethernet data when we expect Fibre Channel data.
|
gfpStatsLFDRaised
|
Indicates the count of core HEC CRC multiple bit errors.
Note This count is only of eHec multiple bit errors when in frame. This can be looked at as a count of when the state machine goes out of frame.
|
gfpRxCmfFrame
|
—
|
gfpTxCmfFrame
|
—
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, choose an alarm type. The alarm type indicates whether or not an event is triggered by the type of threshold.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list,
choose either
Relative
or
Absolute
. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type the number of Sample Period occurrences.
Step 9 Type the number of Rising Threshold occurrences.
To trigger alarm, the measured value of a threshold must always move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network moves from below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds to 1001 collisions.
Step 10 Type the appropriate number of occurrences for the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the exact opposite of a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded.
Step 11 Click
OK
.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G671 Provision the 40G Muxponder Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the 40G-MXP-C trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click
TCA
and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) TCA thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
-
Laser Bias High (%): 95.0
-
RX Power High (dBm): –9.0
-
RX Power Low (dBm): –22.0
-
TX Power High (dBm): 9.0
-
TX Power Low (dBm): 0.0
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 5 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port (Port 5) Alarm thresholds are set at the values shown as follows:
-
Laser Bias High (%): 98.0
-
RX Power High (dBm): –8.0
-
RX Power Low (dBm): –24.0
-
TX Power High (dBm): 7.0
-
TX Power Low (dBm): 3.0
Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G672 Provision the 40G Muxponder Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the 40G-MXP-C card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G278 Provision the Optical Line Rate
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click
TCA
and then click Refresh. If it is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Referring to
Table 6-93
, verify the client ports (Ports 1 through 4) TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface at the other end. Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-93 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interfaces TCA Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
FC8G
|
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
FC10G
|
ONS-XC-10G-1470 through ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-I2
|
2.0
|
–15.8
|
8.0
|
–7.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-L2
|
1.0
|
–14.0
|
5.0
|
–12.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
|
0.0
|
0.0
|
6.0
|
–6.0
|
10GE
|
ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-SR-M
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-I2
|
2.0
|
–15.8
|
8.0
|
–7.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-L2
|
–7.0
|
–24.0
|
6.5
|
–2.5
|
OC192
|
ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470 through ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-L2
|
–9.0
|
–26.0
|
8.0
|
–8.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
–1.0
|
–11.0
|
5.0
|
–12.0
|
OTU2
|
ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470 through ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Repeat Steps
3
and
4
to provision additional client ports.
Step 7 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 8 Referring to
Table 6-94
, verify the client port (Ports 1 through 8) Alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low based on the client interface that is provisioned. Provision new thresholds as needed replacing the old values with new ones.
Table 6-94 40G-MXP-C Card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
|
Pluggable Port Module
(XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
FC8G
|
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
FC10G
|
ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470 through ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-I2
|
4.5
|
–18.3
|
4.5
|
–3.5
|
ONS-XC-10G-L2
|
–4.5
|
–26.5
|
6.5
|
–2.5
|
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
|
2.0
|
–2.0
|
2.0
|
–2.0
|
10GE
|
ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-I2
|
4.5
|
–18.3
|
4.5
|
–3.5
|
ONS-XC-10G-L2
|
–4.5
|
–26.5
|
6.5
|
–2.5
|
OC192
|
ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470 through ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-L2
|
–7.0
|
–28.0
|
4.0
|
–4.0
|
ONS-XC-10G-S1
|
–1.0
|
–13.0
|
1.0
|
–8.0
|
OTU2
|
ONS-XC-10G-30.3 through ONS-XC-10G-61.4
ONS-XC-10G-C
ONS-XC-10G-1470 through ONS-XC-10G-1610
ONS-XC-10G-S1
ONS-XC-10G-I2
ONS-XC-10G-L2
ONS-XC-8G-FC-SM
ONS-XC-10G-SR-MM
|
–9
|
–22
|
9.0
|
0.0
|
Step 9 Click
Apply
.
Step 10 Repeat Steps
7
and
8
to provision additional client ports.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G673 Change the 40G Muxponder OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTN settings for the 40G-MXP-C card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the 40G-MXP-C card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > OTN
tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs:
OTN Lines
,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds
,
FEC Thresholds
, or
Trail Trace Identifier
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables
6-95
through
6-98
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-95
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-95 40G-MXP-C Card OTN Line Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with OTU2 payload.
|
-
1-1
-
2-1
-
3-1
-
4-1
-
5 (Trunk)
|
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
Table 6-96
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-96 40G-MXP-C ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with OTU2 payload.
|
-
1-1
-
2-1
-
3-1
-
4-1
-
5 (Trunk)
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and click
Refresh
.
Click
Reset to Default
to restore default values.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a radio button individually and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select radio button individually and click
Refresh
.
|
Table 6-97
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-97 40G-MXP-C Card FEC Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with OTU2 payload.
|
-
1-1
-
2-1
-
3-1
-
4-1
-
5 (Trunk)
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-98
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-98 40G-MXP-C Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
Applicable for trunk ports and ports with OTU2 payload.
|
-
1-1
-
2-1
-
3-1
-
4-1
-
5 (Trunk)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
Disables alarm indication signal.
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays and sets the current transmit string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Transmit String Type, click
Hex Mode
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode).
|
Transmit string size
|
Expected
|
Displays and sets the current expected string.
You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. In Expected String Type, click
Hex Mode
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex Mode).
|
Expected string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. Click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
Received string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
Automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
-
Checked
-
Unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G281 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Channel Group Settings
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the channel group settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
-
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
-
G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
-
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM (if necessary)
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the channel group settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
-
G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC
-
G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC
-
G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC
-
G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC
-
G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC
-
G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
-
G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
-
G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
-
G619 Create a Channel Group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI
Step 3
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G611 Create a Channel Group Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task creates a channel group on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note You can create up to 11 channel groups on the GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to 2 channel groups on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards. You can create a channel group with ports only when the ports do not have any UNI QinQ settings or NNI SVLAN settings. Otherwise, the channel group will be created with empty ports.
For information on interaction of LACP with other protocols, see the
Protocol Compatibility list
in the
Transponder and Muxponder Cards
chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to create a channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6.
Step 3 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 4 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 5 Click Create. The Channel Group Creation dialog box appears.
Step 6 Enter the name of the channel group in the Name field.
Step 7 From the Stand Alone list, choose the ports that will belong to this channel group and click the right arrow button to move the selected ports to the Bundled list.
Step 8 From the LACP Mode drop-down list, choose the LACP mode as needed:
-
On—Default mode. In this mode, the ports will not exchange LACP packets with the partner ports.
-
Active—In this mode, the ports will send LACP packets at regular intervals to the partner ports.
-
Passive—In this mode, the ports will not send LACP packets until the partner ports send LACP packets. After receiving the LACP packets from the partner ports, the ports will send LACP packets.
Step 9 From the LACP Hashing drop-down list, select the LACP hashing algorithm that the protocol uses to perform the load balancing task between the bundled ports.
The following hashing algorithms are supported:
-
Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port
-
Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port
-
Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port
-
Ucast Src IP TCP UDP
-
Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP
-
Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP
Step 10 Click Create.
A new row is added in the LACP table and all the other parameters in the channel group are set to default values. The default values of these parameters are taken from the first port that is attached to the channel group.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G612 Modify the Parameters of the Channel Group Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task modifies the parameters of the channel group.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Ports cannot be added or removed using this procedure. For adding or removing the ports, see G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to modify the parameters of the channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to modify the parameters of the channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Modify the channel group settings as described in
Table 6-99
.
Table 6-99 Channel Group Settings
|
|
|
Channel Group
|
(Display only) ID and name of the channel group.
|
N.A.
|
Name
|
Sets the name of the channel group.
|
—
|
Ports
|
(Display only) Port number (
n
-
n
) and rate (GE or TEN_GE of the channel group).
|
N.A.
|
LACP Mode
|
Sets the LACP mode. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
|
Hashing
|
Sets the LACP hashing algorithm. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
-
Ucast SA VLAN Incoming Port
-
Ucast DA VLAN Incoming Port
-
Ucast SA DA VLAN Incoming port
-
Ucast Src IP TCP UDP
-
Ucast Dst IP TCP UDP
-
Ucast Src Dst IP TCP UDP
|
Admin State
|
Sets the administrative state on the channel group.
|
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Sets the service state that indicates the operational state of the channel group.
|
|
MTU
|
Sets the maximum transfer unit (MTU), which sets the maximum number of bytes per frame accepted on the port. The member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state. The default MTU value in the channel group is taken from the default settings in the node.
|
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range: 64 to 9700
|
Mode
|
Sets the provisional port mode. If the port mode is Auto, the Expected Speed field determines which ports can belong to the bundle. The member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
|
Expected Speed
|
Sets the expected speed of ports of the channel group. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
-
10 Mbps
-
100 Mbps
-
1000 Mbps
|
Duplex
|
(Display only) Expected duplex capability of ports of the channel group.
|
|
Committed Info Rate
|
Sets the guaranteed information rate as per the service provider service-level agreement. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
|
Committed Burst Size
|
Sets the maximum number of bits transferred per second. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
-
4k (default)
-
8k
-
16k
-
32k
-
64k
-
128k
-
256k
-
512k
-
1M
-
2M
-
4M
-
8M
-
16M
|
Excess Burst Size
|
Sets the maximum number of bits credited for later transfer if the committed burst rate cannot be transmitted. The channel group must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
-
4k (default)
-
8k
-
16k
-
32k
-
64k
-
128k
-
256k
-
512k
-
1M
-
2M
-
4M
-
8M
-
16M
|
NIM
|
Sets the network interface mode (NIM) for the channel group. The member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
The channel group NIM is set to UNI or NNI based on the mode of the first port that is added to the channel group.
|
-
UNI Mode (Default)—provisions the port as a User-Network Interface (UNI). This is the interface that faces the subscriber.
-
NNI Mode—provisions the port as a Network-to-Network Interface (NNI). This is the interface that faces the service provider network.
|
Ingress CoS
|
Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress class of service (CoS). Ingress CoS is used to set the priority of the Ethernet frame in the service provider network. The member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
-
0
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
Trust
-
CVLAN
-
DSCP
|
Inner Ethertype (Hex)
|
Defines the inner Ethertype field. The Ethertype field indicates which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state to modify the Inner Ethertype value to a non-default value.
|
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE Std 802.1Q customer VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff.
|
Outer Ethertype (Hex)
|
Defines the outer Ethertype field. The Ethertype field identifies which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame. The member ports must be in OOS-DSBLD admin state.
|
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE standard 802.1Q service provider VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x600 to 0xffff
|
MAC Learning
|
Enables or disables MAC learning for the port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. MAC learning is used by Layer 2 switches to learn the MAC addresses of network nodes so that the Layer 2 switches send traffic to the right location. In GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE cards, enable MAC address learning per SVLAN.
|
-
Checked—MAC learning is enabled for this port.
-
Unchecked—(Default) MAC learning is disabled for this port.
|
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G613 Add or Remove Ports to or from an Existing Channel Group Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task adds or removes ports to or from an existing channel group.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Before You Begin
-
You can assign up to eight ports to a channel group on GE_XP and GE_XPE cards and up to three ports on the 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards.
-
You can assign the ports to a channel group only if the ports are in OOS-DSBLD admin state. The ports must not have any UNI QinQ rule or NNI SVLAN configuration.
-
If the channel group is configured in UNI mode, only the UNI ports can be added to the channel group. If the channel group is configured in NNI mode, only the NNI ports can be added to the channel group.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want add ports to an existing channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to add ports to an existing channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group from the existing channel groups.
Step 5 Click Add/Remove Ports. The Add/Remove Ports dialog box appears.
Step 6 To add ports to an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Stand Alone list, choose the required ports and click the right arrow button to move the selected ports to the Bundled list.
Step 7 To remove ports from an existing channel group, complete the following:
From the Bundled list, choose the required ports and click the left arrow button to move the selected ports to the Stand Alone list.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G614 Delete a Channel Group Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task deletes a channel group.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to delete the channel group. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XP card where you want to delete the channel group.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Channel Groups tabs.
Step 4 Choose a channel group that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G615 Retrieve Information on Channel Group, REP, CFM, and EFM Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task enables you to view and retrieve information on the channel group, Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP), Connectivity Fault Management (CFM), and Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to view and retrieve information on the channel group, REP, CFM, and EFM. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Maintenance > Show Commands tabs.
Step 4 From the Command drop-down list, choose a command.
The following commands are supported:
-
ETH LACP—Displays detailed LACP information from the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
-
REP TOPO—Displays the topology information for a specific REP segment.
-
REP TOPO ARCHIVE—Displays the previous topology information for a specific REP segment.
-
REP INTERFACE—Displays information on the REP interface status and configuration. You can retrieve detailed information for each segment by selecting Detailed from the Level drop-down list and providing the segment ID.
-
OAM DISCOVERY—Displays discovery information for all the EFM interfaces or for a specific EFM interface.
-
OAM SUMMARY—Displays the active EFM sessions on a device.
-
OAM STATISTICS—Displays detailed information about the EFM packets.
-
OAM STATUS—Displays information about the EFM configurations for all the EFM interfaces or for a specific interface.
For more information, see the Pseudo Command Line Interface Reference chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 5 From the Level drop-down list, choose Normal or Detailed.
Step 6 Click Show. Depending on the command, the appropriate output appears in the text area.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G616 View Channel Group PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task enables you to view current statistical performance monitoring (PM) counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to view the channel group PM counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group statistics. The card view appears.
Step 3 Click the
Performance
>
Channel Groups
>
Statistics
tabs.
Step 4 Click
Refresh
. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the Statistics tab.
View the PM parameter names in the Param column. The current PM parameter values appear in the Port # (CHGRP) column. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the G73 Change the PM Display.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G617 View Channel Group Utilization PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task enables you to view line utilization PM counts on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to view the channel group utilization PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view, double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group utilization. The card view appears.
Step 3 Click the
Performance
>
Channel Groups > Utilization
tabs.
Step 4 Click
Refresh
. The utilization percentages for each channel group on the card appear in the Utilization tab.
View the Port # column to find the channel group you want to monitor.
The transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) bandwidth utilization values, for the previous time intervals, appear in the Prev-
n
columns. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the G73 Change the PM Display.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G618 View Channel Group History PM Parameters for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task enables you to view historical PM counts at selected time intervals on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards and channel groups to detect possible performance problems.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to view the channel group history PM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 2 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card where you want to view the channel group history PM data. The card view appears.
Step 3 Click the
Performance
>
Channel Groups > History
tabs.
Step 4 From the Port field, choose a channel group.
Step 5 Click
Refresh
. Performance monitoring statistics for each channel group on the card appear in the History tab.
View the PM parameter names that appear in the Param column. The PM parameter values appear in the Prev-
n
columns. For PM parameter definitions, refer to the “Performance Monitoring” chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
Note To refresh, reset, or clear PM counts, see the G73 Change the PM Display.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G283 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card CFM Settings
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the CFM settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
-
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
-
G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
-
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM (if necessary)
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the CFM settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Step 3
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G621 Enable or Disable CFM on the Card Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to enable or disable CFM on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note CFM is disabled on the card by default. CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM service to work.
For information on interaction of CFM with other protocols, see the
Protocol Compatibility list
in the
Transponder and Muxponder Cards
chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable or disable CFM on the card. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > Security tab.
Step 4 Uncheck the MAC security check box to disable MAC security.
Step 5 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Step 6 Check the Enable CFM check box that is present at the bottom of the screen.
Step 7 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between maintenance end points (MEPs). The CC Timer field is used to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 8 Click Apply to enable CFM on the card.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box to disable CFM on the card.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G622 Enable or Disable CFM for Each Port Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to enable or disable CFM for each port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note CFM must be enabled at both card and port levels for the CFM service to work. However, CFM is enabled on all the ports by default.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable or disable CFM for each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Global Settings tabs.
Step 4 If you want to enable CFM on a specific port, check the Enable CFM check box against that port.
Step 5 Choose the value for CC Timer field. The value can be 1 second, 10 seconds, or 1 minute.
Note Continuity Check (CC) messages are periodically exchanged between MEPs. The CC Timer field is used to set the time frequency for transmission of CC messages.
Step 6 Click Apply to enable CFM on the port.
Note Uncheck the Enable CFM check box against the port to disable CFM on the port.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G623 Create a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to create a maintenance domain profile on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Before You Begin
-
You can create up to eight maintenance domain profiles on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
-
The maximum number of characters for the maintenance domain profile and the maintenance association profile must not exceed 43 characters.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to create a maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the domain profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 Enter the name of the domain in the Domain Name field.
Step 6 Enter the level of the domain profile in the Level field. The range of the domain profile level is from 0 to 7.
Step 7 Click Store.
Step 8 Choose the card slot where you want to store this domain profile and click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G624 Delete a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to delete a maintenance domain profile on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to delete a maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > Domain Profiles tabs or in node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > Domain Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the domain profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G625 Create a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to create a maintenance association profile on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note You can create up to 1500 maintenance association profiles on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to create a maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Note Use the network view to store the maintenance association profile on multiple nodes.
Step 4 Click Add row(s).
Step 5 Enter the name of the maintenance association in the Maintenance Profile Name field.
Step 6 Enter the VLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the VLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Check the CC Enable check box to receive Continuity Check messages.
Step 8 Click Store.
Step 9 Choose the card slot where you want to store this maintenance association profile and click OK.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G626 Modify a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to modify a maintenance association profile on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to modify is not associated with a maintenance domain profile.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to modify a maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to modify.
Step 5 Click Modify Selected Profile(s). The Modify MA Profile dialog box appears.
Step 6 Modify the values as required and click OK.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G627 Delete a Maintenance Association Profile Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to delete a maintenance association profile on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note Ensure that the maintenance association profile you want to delete is not associated with a maintenance domain profile.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to delete a maintenance association profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA Profiles tabs or in node/network view, click the Provisioning > CFM Profiles > MA Profiles tabs.
Step 4 Select the maintenance association profiles that you want to delete.
Step 5 Check the on Node check box.
Step 6 Click Delete Sel. row(s). The CFM Profile Deleting dialog box appears.
Step 7 Choose the card slot where you want to delete this profile and click OK. The Deleting Profile dialog box appears.
Step 8 In the Deleting Profile dialog box, click Yes.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G628 Map a Maintenance Association Profile to a Maintenance Domain Profile Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to map a maintenance association profile to a maintenance domain profile on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note Ensure that you have already created maintenance domain profiles and maintenance association profiles.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to map a maintenance association profile to a maintenance domain profile. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MA-Domain Mapping tabs.
Step 4 From the main drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain profile.
Step 5 Click Link MA Profiles. The Link MA Profiles dialog box appears.
Step 6 From the Available Profiles list, choose the required MA profiles and click the right arrow button to move the MA profiles to the Linked Profiles list and click OK.
Note The maintenance association profiles that are mapped with a specific maintenance domain profile must have a unique SVLAN ID.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G629 Create a MEP Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to create a Maintenance End Point (MEP) for a given VLAN range on a specific maintenance domain.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to create a MEP. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MEP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MEP.
Note CFM must be enabled on the port to create a MEP. The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Domain drop-down list, choose a maintenance domain.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN ID in the Vlan Id field.
Note The specified VLAN must be configured on the selected port. The specified VLAN must also appear in the MA-Domain Mapping table.
Step 8 Enter the MP ID (identifier of the maintenance end point) in the MPID field and click OK. The range of the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
The MP ID must not be the same between the maintenance end points.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G630 Delete a MEP Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to delete a MEP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to delete a MEP. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MEP tabs.
Step 4 Select the MEPs that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G631 Create a MIP Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to create a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP) for a given VLAN range with a specific maintenance level.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note You can create up to 255 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XP and 10GE_XP cards. You can create up to 500 MEPs and MIPs on the GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to create a MIP. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MIP tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create MIP dialog box appears.
Step 5 From the Port drop-down list, choose a port where you want to create the MIP.
Note The port must not belong to a channel group.
Step 6 From the Level drop-down list, choose a maintenance level. The range of the maintenance level is from 0 to 7.
Step 7 Enter the SVLAN range in the Vlan range field. The range of the SVLAN is from 1 to 4093.
Note The specified SVLAN must be configured on the selected port.
Step 8 Click OK.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G632 Delete a MIP Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to delete a MIP on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to delete a MIP. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Configuration > MIP tabs.
Step 4 Select the MIPs that you want to delete.
Step 5 Click Delete.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G633 Ping MEP Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to display the output of the ping command on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to ping MEP. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Ping tabs.
Step 4 Enter the MP ID value in the MPID field. The range of the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
Note Remote MP ID user cannot ping local MP ID.
Step 5 (Optional) Enter the MAC address of the remote maintenance point in the Mac Addr field. The format of MAC address is abcd.abcd.abcd.
Step 6 Enter the SVLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the SVLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Enter the domain name in the Domain Name field.
Step 8 Enter the size of the ping packet in the DataGram Size field. The default value is 100.
Step 9 Enter the number of ping packets in the No of Requests field. The default value is 5.
Step 10 Click Ping. The output of the ping command appears in the Ping Response area.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G634 Traceroute MEP Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to display the output of the traceroute command on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to view the output of the traceroute command. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > CFM > Traceroute tabs.
Step 4 Enter the remote MP ID value in the MPID field. The range of the MP ID is from 1 to 8191.
Step 5 (Optional) Enter the MAC address of the remote maintenance point in the Mac Addr field. The format of MAC address is abcd.abcd.abcd.
Step 6 Enter the SVLAN ID in the VLAN ID field. The range of the SVLAN ID is from 1 to 4093.
Step 7 Enter the domain name in the Domain Name field.
Step 8 Click TraceRoute Response.
The output of the traceroute command appears in the TraceRoute Response area.
-
Verify the RlyHit message is shown in the traceroute display and LTM reaches a maintenance point whose MAC address matches the target MAC address.
-
Verify the RlyFDB message is shown in the traceroute display when the next hop address is found in the forwarding database.
-
Verify the RlyMPDB message is shown in the traceroute display when the next hop address is found in the CCDN.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G285 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card EFM Settings
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the EFM settings of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
-
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
-
G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
-
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM (if necessary)
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the EFM settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G639 Enable or Disable EFM for Each Port Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to enable or disable EFM for each port on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Before You Begin
-
You can enable EFM on both UNI and NNI ports.
-
You cannot enable or disable EFM for ports that belong to a channel group.
-
For information on interaction of EFM with other protocols, see the
Protocol Compatibility list
in the
Transponder and Muxponder Cards
chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable or disable EFM for each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Configuration tabs. The EFM details appear for each port.
Step 4 From the EFM State drop-down list, choose Enabled.
Step 5 Click Apply to enable EFM for that port.
Note From the EFM State drop-down list, choose Disabled to disable EFM for that port.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G640 Configure EFM Parameters Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to configure EFM parameters on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to configure EFM parameters. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Configuration tabs.
Step 4 Modify the EFM parameter settings as described in
Table 6-100
.
Table 6-100 EFM Parameter Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number (
n
-
n
) and rate (GE or TEN_GE).
|
—
|
EFM State
|
Sets the state of the EFM protocol for each port.
|
|
Mode
|
Sets the operating mode of the port. If the mode is Active, the port sends OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDUs) at regular intervals to the partner ports. If the mode is Passive, the port will not send OAMPDUs until the partner ports send OAMPDUs.
|
|
Link Fault
|
Sets the Remote Failure Indication (RFI) action. If the link is down on a port, the link fault RFI is sent to the partner port through OAMPDU. An alarm indicating the remote failure indication link fault (RFI-LF) is raised. The alarm is cleared after you clear the link fault condition.
You can specify the following actions for link fault RFI:
-
Error Block—The interface is placed in the error-block state and the RFI-LF alarm is raised.
-
None—Only the RFI-LF alarm is raised.
Note Dying Gasp and critical events are not supported.
|
|
Session Timer
|
Sets the duration up to when the EFM session is retained with the partner port without receiving OAMPDUs.
|
Default: 5 seconds
Range: 2 to 30 seconds
|
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G641 Configure EFM Link Monitoring Parameters Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to configure EFM link monitoring parameters for each port on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to configure EFM link monitoring parameters. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Link Monitoring tabs.
Step 4 Modify the EFM link monitoring parameter settings as described in
Table 6-101
.
Table 6-101 EFM Link Monitoring Parameter Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number (
n
-
n
) and rate (GE or TEN_GE).
|
—
|
EF Max
|
Sets the threshold value for the maximum number of errored frames to detect during a specific period.
|
Range: 1 to 65535
|
EF Min
|
Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of errored frames to detect during a specific period.
|
Range: 0 to 65535
|
EF Action
|
Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the maximum threshold value, the applicable action is None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient condition) is generated.
|
|
EF Window
|
Period in which the errored frame parameters are monitored.
|
Range: 10 to 600
|
EFP Max
|
Sets the threshold value for the maximum number of errored frames within the last n frames.
|
Range: 1 to 65535
|
EFP Min
|
Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of errored frames within the last n frames.
|
Range: 0 to 65535
|
EFP Action
|
Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the maximum threshold value, the applicable action is None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient condition) is generated.
|
|
EFP Window
|
Period in which the EFP parameters are monitored.
|
Range: 1 to 65535
|
EFSS Max
|
Sets the threshold value for the maximum number of errored seconds within the last m seconds.
|
Range: 1 to 900
|
EFSS Min
|
Sets the threshold value for the minimum number of errored seconds within the last m seconds.
|
Range: 0 to 900
|
EFSS Action
|
Specifies that when the parameter value exceeds the maximum threshold value, the applicable action is None.
When the parameter value falls below the minimum threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (transient condition) is generated.
|
|
EFSS Window
|
Specifies the period when the EFSS parameters are monitored.
|
Range: 100 to 9000
|
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G642 Enable Remote Loopback for Each Port Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to enable remote loopback for each port on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable the remote loopback for each port. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > EFM > Loopback tabs.
The remote loopback type details appear for each port.
Step 4 From the Remote Loopback Type drop-down list, choose Remote Loopback.
Step 5 Click Apply to save the changes.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G287 Manage the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card REP Settings
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the REP settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
-
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
-
G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
-
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM (if necessary)
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the REP settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G713 Provision Administrative VLAN for Ports in a REP Segment Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to provision administrative VLAN for NNI and UNI ports in a REP segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note One administrative CVLAN and one administrative SVLAN can be provisioned for each card. The REP segments using NNI ports send Hardware Flood Layer (HFL) messages using the administrative SVLAN. The REP segments using UNI ports send HFL messages using the administrative CVLAN. The two VLANs need not be the same.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to provision administrative VLAN. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the
Provisioning
>
REP
>
Admin VLAN Configuration
tabs.
Step 4 To provision administrative VLAN for NNI ports in a REP segment, perform the following steps:
a. From the SVLAN drop-down list, choose a SVLAN. The following table describes the REP convergence time for SVLANs.
Table 6-102 REP Convergence Time for SVLANs
|
|
|
0 (default)
|
Not configured
|
4 to 5 seconds
|
1 to 4093
|
Configured
|
Less than 200 milliseconds
|
b. Click
Apply
.
c. To associate the chosen SVLAN with the NNI ports, see G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports.
Step 5 To provision administrative VLAN for UNI ports in a REP segment, perform the following steps:
a. Enter the CVLAN in the CVLAN field.
b. Click
Apply
.
c. To associate the CVLAN with the UNI ports, see G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G645 Create a Segment Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to create a segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Before You Begin
-
You can create up to three segments on a card. Each segment can have up to two ports on the same switch.
-
You must configure the REP administrative VLAN to activate the Hardware Flood Layer (HFL).
-
Before creating REP segments, you must configure the administrative VLAN or use the default VLAN 1 and add the ports to the segment. Only one SVLAN can be configured per card for all the three segments.
-
You must configure two edge ports in the segment. A segment has only one primary edge port. If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example, ports on different switches, REP selects one of the ports to serve as the primary edge port based on port priority.
-
If REP is enabled on two ports on a switch, both the ports must be either regular ports or edge ports. However, if the No-neighbor port is configured, one port can be an edge port and another port can be a regular port.
-
You can also optionally configure where to send segment topology change notifications (STCNs) and VLAN load balancing (VLB). STCNs are enabled only for primary edge ports. VLB configurations are enabled on any edge ports.
-
For information on interaction of REP with other protocols, see the
Protocol Compatibility list
in the
Transponder and Muxponder Cards
chapter in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to create a segment. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs.
Step 4 Click Create. The Create Segment wizard appears.
Step 5 Enter the segment ID in the Segment field. The range of the segment ID is from 1 to 1024.
Step 6 From the Port drop-drown list, choose a REP port that must belong to this segment.
Note A REP port can belong to only one segment.
Step 7 From the Port Role area, choose whether you want to configure the port as an edge port or a regular port. The options are:
a. Edge—The port is configured as an edge port.
-
Check the Primary check box to configure the edge port as a primary edge port for VLAN load balancing. A segment can have only one primary edge port
-
Uncheck the Primary check box to configure the edge port as a secondary edge port.
-
Check the Preferred check box to configure the edge port as a preferred alternate port (alternate to primary edge port) for VLAN load balancing.
Note Configuring a port as preferred does not ensure that it becomes the alternate port; it gives it preference over other similar ports.
-
Check the NoNeighbor check box if the edge port must not have a neighbor port. REP does not check for neighbor adjacency.
Note When the NoNeighbor check box is checked, ensure that only one segment is created.
b. None—The port is configured as a regular port. If you choose this option, Segment Topology Change Notifications (STCN) and VLAN Load Balancing (VLB) configurations are disabled.
Check the Preferred check box to configure the regular port as a preferred alternate port.
Step 8 From the STCN area, configure the destination of STCN messages:
a. Check the Enable check box to enable sending STCN messages.
b. From the Port drop-down list, choose the STCN port to send STCN messages or enter the segment ID in the Segment field to send STCN messages. The STCN port and REP port must be unique.
Step 9 From the VLAN Load Balancing area, configure VLAN Load Balancing on the primary edge port:
a. Check the Enable check box to enable VLB.
b. Enter a single SVLAN or range of SVLANs in the SVLAN field.
c. Enter the Rep PortId in the Rep PortId field to identify the VLAN blocking alternate port. This unique port ID is automatically generated when REP is enabled.
d. Check the Preferred check box to select the segment port previously identified as the preferred alternate port for VLAN load balancing.
Step 10 From the VLB Preempt Delay area, enter the trigger delay for automatic VLB activation. The range is 15 to 300 seconds.
Step 11 Click Next.
Step 12 Enter the details of the second port to add it to the segment.
Repeat Step 6 to
10
when the first port is configured as a regular port and the second port is configured as a primary edge port. Repeat Step 6 to
7
when the first port is configured as a primary edge port and the second port is configured as a regular port.
Step 13 Click Finish.
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G646 Edit a Segment Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to edit a segment on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note You can edit only the STCN and VLB entries for a segment.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to edit a segment. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Edit.
Step 6 Modify the values as required and click Finish.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G647 Activate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to activate VLAN load balancing on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Note When VLAN load balancing is activated, the default configuration is manual preemption with the delay timer disabled.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to activate VLAN load balancing. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Activate VLB.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G648 Deactivate VLAN Load Balancing Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task allows you to deactivate VLAN load balancing on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Retrieve or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to deactivate VLAN load balancing. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card is installed in L2-over-DWDM mode. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 3 In card view, click the Provisioning > REP > Segment tabs. The list of segments appear.
Step 4 Choose a segment from the list of segments.
Step 5 Click Deactivate VLB.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G165 Modify the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE Cards Ethernet Parameters, Line Settings, and PM Thresholds
Purpose
|
This procedure changes Ethernet, line, and PM threshold settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
G63 Install an SFP or XFP
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 Verify the card mode:
a. Display the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card in card view.
b. Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
c. Verify that the card mode is set to the mode designated by your site plan:
– L2-over-DWDM (GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE)
– 10GE TXP (10GE_XP or 10 GE_XPE)
– 10GE MXP (GE_XP or GE_XPE)
– 20GE MXP (GE_XP or GE_XPE)
If the card mode is set correctly, continue with
Step 4
. If not, complete the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 4 Complete the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.
Step 5 If the ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFP is inserted in the GE_XPE card, complete the following tasks, as needed.
Step 6 If the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card mode is L2-over-DWDM, complete the following tasks, as needed. If the card mode is not L2-over-DWDM, continue with Step 7.
-
G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings
-
G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database
-
G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports
-
G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings
-
G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings
-
G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards.
-
G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
-
G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards or G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
-
G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card or G224 Enable MVR on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
-
G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC or G226 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
Step 7 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
Note To use the Alarm Profiles tab, including creating alarm profiles and suppressing alarms, see Chapter10, “Manage Alarms”
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the Ethernet settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Ether Ports > Ethernet
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Ethernet tab as described in
Table 6-103
. The parameters that appear depend on the card mode.
Table 6-103 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Ethernet Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) The Port number (
n
-
n
) and rate (GE or TEN_GE).
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE TXP
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
—
|
MTU
|
The maximum size of the Ethernet frames accepted by the port. The port must be in OOS/locked state.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE TXP
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Numeric. Default: 9700
Range 64 to 9700 (for R9.1 and later) (jumbo frame)
|
Mode
|
Sets the Ethernet mode. The port must be in OOS/locked state before setting the card mode.
Note For GE_XP and GE_XPE cards that are in Y-cable protection groups, Mode must be set to 1000 Mbps for those client ports that are configured in Y-cable. For 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards that are in Y-cable protection groups, Mode must be set to 10000 Mbps.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE TXP
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
-
Auto (default)
-
Display Only
-
1000 Mbps
-
10000 Mbps
Note If Mode is set to Auto on the GE_XP or GE_XPE port, autonegotiation gets enabled on the peer port.
Note On GE_XP card, the copper Pluggable Port Module (PPM) interface can auto-negotiate and carry traffic even when the peer interface operates at rates other than 1000 Mbps.
|
Flow Control
|
Enables/disables flow control messaging with its peer port. When enabled, the port can send and receive PAUSE frames when buffer congestion occurs. When disabled, no PAUSE frames are transmitted and the PAUSE frames received are discarded.
Note Flow control messaging is symmetric and not negotiated. When flow control is enabled on one port, the other end of the link (peer port) is not considered. That is, even if flow control is disabled on the peer port, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card will send PAUSE frames.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
10GE TXP
-
20GE MXP
|
-
ON—Flow control is enabled.
-
OFF (default)—Flow control is disabled.
-
Display Only.
|
Media Type
|
(GE_XPE card only) Sets the Media Type.
Note PROV-MISMATCH alarm is raised if the Media Type is not set to Ethernet Over DS1 (ANSI) or Ethernet Over E1 (ETSI) for ONS-SC-EOP1,Ethernet Over DS3 (ANSI) or Ethernet Over E3 (ETSI) for ONS-SC-EOP3, or DS1 Over Ethernet (ANSI) or E1 Over Ethernet (ETSI) for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or DS3 Over Ethernet (ANSI) or E3 Over Ethernet (ETSI) ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW. Set the correct Media Type to clear the PROV-MISMATCH alarm.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
-
Ethernet Over DS1 (ANSI) (for ONS-SC-EOP1)
-
Ethernet Over E1 (ETSI) (for ONS-SC-EOP1)
-
Ethernet Over DS3 (ANSI) (for ONS-SC-EOP3)
-
Ethernet Over E3 (ETSI) (for ONS-SC-EOP3)
-
DS1 over Ethernet (ANSI) (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW)
-
DS3 over Ethernet (ANSI) (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW)
-
E1 Over Ethernet (ETSI) (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW)
-
E3 Over Ethernet (ETSI) (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW)
|
Committed Info Rate
|
Sets the guaranteed information rate as provided by the service provider service-level agreement. The port must be in OOS/locked state.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Numeric. Default: 100
Range: 0 to 100%
|
Committed Burst Size
|
Sets the maximum number of bits that will be transferred per second. The port must be in OOS/locked state before the Committed Burst Size is provisioned.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
-
4k (default)
-
8k
-
16k
-
32k
-
64k
-
128k
-
256k
-
512k
-
1MB
-
2MB
-
8MB
-
16MB
|
Excess Burst Size
|
The maximum number of bits that are credited for later transfer in the event the committed burst rate cannot be transmitted. The port must be in OOS/locked state before the Excess Burst Size is provisioned.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
-
None
-
4k (default)
-
8k
-
16k
-
32k
-
64k
-
128k
-
256k
-
512k
-
1MB
-
2MB
-
8MB
-
16MB
|
NIM
|
Sets the port network interface mode (NIM). This parameter classifies port types designed for the Metro Ethernet market to simplify deployment, management, and troubleshooting. The port must be in OOS/locked state before the NIM is provisioned.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
-
UNI Mode—provisions the port as a user-to-network interface (UNI). This is the interface that faces the subscriber.
-
NNI Mode—provisions the port as a network-to-network interface. This is the interface that faces the service provider network.
|
Egress QoS
|
Enables Quality of Service (QoS) on the port’s egress or output queues. The port must be in OOS/locked state before the Egress QoS is provisioned.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
-
Checked—QoS is enabled on the port’s egress queues.
-
Unchecked—(Default) QoS is disabled on the port’s egress queues.
|
MAC Learning
|
Enables or disables MAC learning for the port on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards. MAC learning is used by Layer 2 switches to learn the MAC addresses of network nodes so the Layer 2 switches send traffic to the right location. Layer 2 switches, including the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards in L2-over-DWDM mode with MAC Learning configured, maintain a MAC learning table that associates the MAC addresses and VLANs with a given port.
Note MAC addresses on SVLANs attached to the port must also be enabled to provision MAC address learning on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards.
Note MAC address table aging is 300 seconds. It cannot be changed.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
-
Checked—MAC learning is enabled for this port.
-
Unchecked—(Default) MAC learning is disabled.
|
Ingress CoS
|
Provisions the IEEE 802.1p ingress Class of Service (CoS). The CoS .1p bits set the Ethernet frame priority. The port must be in OOS/locked state before the Ingress CoS is provisioned.
Ingress CoS is used to set the priority of the Ethernet frame in the service provider network, This parameter is used to set the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag.
Ingress CoS applies only to ports provisioned as UNI mode. It does not apply to ports provisioned as NNI mode.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
-
0—(default) All incoming frames on the port will have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set to 0.
-
1—All incoming frames on the port will have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set to 1.
-
2—All incoming frames on the port will have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set to 2.
-
3—All incoming frames on the port will have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set to 3.
-
4—All incoming frames on the port will have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set to 4.
-
5—All incoming frames on the port will have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set to 5.
-
6—All incoming frames on the port will have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set to 6.
-
7—All incoming frames on the port will have the CoS .1p bits in the SVLAN tag set to 7.
-
Trust—Automatically copies customer VLAN tag into the service provider VLAN tag.
-
CVLAN—CoS can be provisioned based on CVLAN. For information on how CoS can be provisioned on the IEEE 802.1QinQ CVLAN tags, refer to the G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings.
If CVLAN CoS is configured on a GE_XP or a 10GE_XP card, a PROV-MISMATCH alarm is raised. Until this alarm is cleared, provisioning on the card is not possible.
The CVLAN CoS configuration takes effect only after QinQ is configured.
|
Inner Ethertype (Hex)
|
Defines the inner Ethertype field. The Ethertype field indicates which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame.
The inner Ethertype applies to ports provisioned in UNI mode only. It does not apply to ports provisioned as NNI mode. The ports must be OOS/locked before the inner Ethertype is provisioned.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE Std 802.1Q customer VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x0600 to 0xFFFF
|
Outer Ethertype (Hex)
|
Defines the outer Ethertype field. The Ethertype field identifies which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame. The ports must be OOS/locked before the Outer Ethertype is provisioned.
Note The PROV-MISMATCH alarm is raised on GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards if more than four different Outer Ethertype options are configured per card.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
Numeric.
Default: 8100 (IEEE 802.1Q customer VLAN tag type)
Range: 0x0600 to 0xFFFF
|
IGMP Static Router Port
|
Adds multicast-capable ports to the forwarding table for every IP multicast.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
-
Checked—IGMP static router port is enabled.
-
Unchecked—(Default) IGMP static router port is disabled.
|
AIS Action
|
Defines the AIS action type provisioned on the port.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
-
None—No action.
-
Squelch—When an AIS packet is received on a SVLAN terminating on the UNI-port, the UNI port is squelched.
|
Protection Action
|
Configures the standby port behavior.
Set Protection Action to None if Media Type is set to Ethernet Over DS1 (ANSI) or Ethernet Over E1 (ETSI) for ONS-SC-EOP1, Ethernet Over DS3 (ANSI) or Ethernet Over E3 (ETSI) for ONS-SC-EOP3, or DS1 Over Ethernet (ANSI) or E1 Over Ethernet (ETSI) for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or DS3 Over Ethernet (ANSI) or E3 Over Ethernet (ETSI) for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW.
|
L2-over-DWDM
|
-
None—No action.
-
Squelch—The laser on the standby port in a 1+1 protection group is squelched. This setting has no effect if the port is not part of the 1+1 protection group.
|
Table 6-104
shows the inner and outer Ethertype behavior based on the NIM setting (either NNI mode or UNI mode). When the NIM is set to UNI, and the QinQ mode is set to Selective, the Ethertype behavior depends on the SVLAN/CVLAN operation that is provisioned, either Add or Translate. (QinQ parameters are provisioned in the G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings.)
Note A packet can exit out of any UNI/NNI port if the outermost tag in the packet matches with the SVLAN provisioned on that port. In other words, in the egress path, the inner tags (even if present) of the packet are not matched with the inner SVLAN or CVLAN provisioned on the port.
Note The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be configured based on the expected packet size to ensure that no packets are dropped when Flow Control is enabled. For example, if the CIR is 40% and packet size is 1 KB, the Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size should be set to 1 MB.
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Table 6-104 Ethertype Behavior
|
|
|
|
|
Selective
Operation: Translate
|
Inner Ethertype
|
Not applicable: the outer Ethertype value is used.
|
Not applicable: all packets are mapped over the SVLAN.
|
Working (card-based)
|
Working (card-based)
|
Outer Ethertype
|
Working (per port)
|
Not applicable: the outer Ethertype is contained in the inner VLAN (same as UNI Selective mode).
|
Not applicable: the outer Ethertype is the one contained in the inner VLAN.
|
This cannot be set by port, only by card. The outer Ethertype is automatically set to the inner Ethertype.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G684 Provision the GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the PDH Ethernet settings for the GE_XPE card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Provisioning > Ether Ports > PDH Ethernet Parameters tab is available in GE_XPE card view only, provided the PPM for GE_XPE port is created in FE mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XPE card where you want to change the PDH Ethernet settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Ether Ports > PDH Ethernet Parameters
tabs. The PDH Ethernet Parameters tab appear only when the ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFP is inserted.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the PDH Ethernet Parameters tab as described in
Table 6-105
.
Table 6-105 GE_XPE Card PDH Ethernet Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) The Port number (
n
-
n
) and rate.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
—
|
Port Name
|
(Display only) The port name.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
—
|
MPLS Inner Label
|
Sets the MPLS Inner Label value.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Default: 16
Range: 16-65535.
|
MPLS Outer Label
|
Sets the MPLS Outer Label value.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Default: 16
Range: 16-65535.
|
Jitter Buffer
|
Sets the jitter buffer value.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Default: 1500
Range: 400-200000.
Table 6-106
provides jitter buffer values for different payloads.
Note The traffic is down if the jitter buffer is set to >=192000 when Media Type is set to DS1 over Ethernet (ANSI) (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW) and E1 Over Ethernet (ETSI) (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW).
|
RX Sensitivity
|
(ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW only) Sets the RX sensitivity value.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Default: –36 (ANSI), –12 (ETSI)
Range: –36 to –15 (ANSI), –12 to –43 (ETSI)
|
Source IP Address
|
Enter the source IP address. Only Unicast IP addresses are accepted.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
—
|
Peer IP Address
|
Enter the peer IP address. Only Unicast IP addresses are accepted.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
—
|
Table 6-106 Jitter Buffer Values for Various Payload Types
|
|
|
|
T1 (DS1)
|
1500
|
20000
|
T3 (DS3)
|
400
|
4500
|
E1
|
1500
|
200000
|
E3
|
400
|
60000
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G685 Provision the GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the Electrical Lines settings for the GE_XPE card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The Provisioning > Ether Ports > Electrical Lines tab is available in GE_XPE card view only, provided the PPM for GE_XPE port is created in FE mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XPE card where you want to change the Electrical Lines settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Ether Ports > Electrical Lines
tabs. The Electrical Lines tab appear only when the ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW or ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW SFP is inserted.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings for the Electrical Lines > DS1 or Electrical Lines > DS3 tab as described in
Table 6-107
.
Table 6-107 GE_XPE Card Electrical Lines Settings
|
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) The Port number (
n
-
n
) and rate.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
—
|
Port Name
|
(Display only) The port name.
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
—
|
Clock Source
|
Sets the Clock Source
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Default:
-
Internal (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW)
-
Adaptive (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW)
Options:
-
Loopback Timing
-
Internal
-
Adaptive
|
Line Type
|
Sets the Line Type
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Default:
-
C-BIT (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ANSI)
-
Unframed (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ETSI)
-
ESF (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ANSI)
-
Framed (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ETSI)
Options:
-
G.751 (ETSI)
-
G.832 (ETSI)
-
C-BIT (ANSI)
-
ESF (ANSI)
-
M23 (ANSI)
-
Framed (ETSI)
-
Unframed (ETSI)
|
Line Coding
|
Sets the Line Coding
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Default:
-
B3ZS (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ANSI)
-
HDB3 (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ETSI)
-
B8ZS (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ANSI)
-
HDB3 (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ETSI)
Options:
-
AMI (ETSI)
-
B3ZS (ANSI)
-
B8ZS (ANSI)
-
HDB3 (ETSI)
|
Line Length
|
(ANSI only) Sets the Line Length
|
-
L2-over-DWDM
-
10GE MXP
-
20GE MXP
|
Defaults:
-
0-225 ft (for ONS-SC-E3-T3-PW ANSI)
-
266-399 ft (for ONS-SC-E1-T1-PW ANSI)
Options (ANSI only):
-
0-133 ft
-
0-225 ft
-
133-266 ft
-
225-450 ft
-
266-399 ft
-
399-533 ft
-
533-655 ft
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G381 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 Protection Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the Layer 2 protection settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards when the cards are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode. To change the card mode, complete the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Note GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 protection settings must be planned for the entire VLAN ring. One card in the ring is provisioned as the master card and one of its port is set to Blocking. The master card coordinates the protection switching for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE in a VLAN ring.
Note You can choose to enable another card in the ring to be the master card. However, only one card in the ring can be provisioned as master card. Make sure that the provisioning settings on the card that was previously configured as the master are disabled as soon as another card is enabled as the master card. To perform this task complete the G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the protection settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
Step 3 In the Status column, modify the port protection status by clicking the appropriate table cell and choosing one of the following from the drop-down list:
-
Forwarding—Forwards the Ethernet packets that are received by the port.
-
Blocking—Blocks the Ethernet packets that are received by the port.
Note One port of the master card within a VLAN ring must be set to Blocking. All other ports must be set to Forwarding.
Step 4 Check the
Master
check box if you want the card to serve as the protection coordinator for the VLAN ring. If not, continue with Step 5.
Step 5 From the Protection drop-down list, choose one of the following:
-
Enabled—Enables protection.
-
Disabled—Disables protection.
-
Forced—Converts all the SVLANs to protected SVLANs irrespective of the SVLAN protection configuration in the SVLAN database. This is applicable to a point-to-point linear topology. The SVLAN protection must be forced to move all SVLANs, including protected and unprotected SVLANs, to the protect path irrespective of provisioned SVLAN attributes.
Step 6 From the Hold Off Time drop-down list, choose one of the following:
-
Disabled (default)—A FAPS switchover occurs immediately.
-
50 msec, 100 msec, 200 msec, 500 msec, 1 sec, 2 sec, or 5 sec—Holds off FAPS protection for the selected duration.
Note To get consistent results ensure Hold Off Time values are the same throughout the ring.
Note FAPS is an L2 protection enabled on a VLAN. When a fiber fault occurs, L1 protection is triggered immediately to restore the traffic. Setting the Hold Off Time option prevents L2 FAPS protection from triggering at the same time as L1 protection thereby avoiding traffic hits.
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
Step 8 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G507 Enable a Different GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card as the Master Card
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode. To change the card mode, complete the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Note Do not attempt to change the master card when there is a failure in the FAPS ring.
Note GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Layer 2 protection must be enabled for the entire VLAN ring. One card in the ring is provisioned as the master card and one of its port is set to Blocking. The master card coordinates the protection switching for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards in a VLAN ring.
Note You can choose to enable another card in the ring to be the master card. However, only one card in the ring can be provisioned as master card. Make sure that the provisioning settings on the card that was previously configured as the master are disabled as soon as another card is enabled as the master card.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card in a VLAN ring where you want to enable master card provisioning. The card view appears. Perform the following steps:
a. Click the
Provisioning
>
Protection
tabs.
b. From the Status drop-down list, choose
Blocking
for a trunk port.
Note One port of the master card within a VLAN ring must be set to Blocking. All other ports must be set to Forwarding.
c. Check the
Master
check box for the card that serves as the protection coordinator for the VLAN ring.
d. From the Protection drop-down list, choose
Enabled
.
e. Click
Apply
.
Step 2 The master card provisioning on the other card must be disabled. Perform the following steps:
a. Click the
Provisioning
>
Protection
tabs.
b. Uncheck the
Master
check box for the card where Master node provisioning must be disabled.
c. Click
Apply
.
d. From the Protection drop-down list, choose
Disabled
.
e. Click
Apply
.
Step 3 The protection on the card that was disabled in Step 2 must be enabled again. Perform the following steps:
a. Click the
Provisioning > Protection
tabs.
b. From the Protection drop-down list, choose
Enabled
.
c. Click
Apply
.
d. From the Status drop-down list, choose
Forwarding
on both ports.
e. Click
Apply
.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports
Purpose
|
This task adds or removes service provider VLAN (SVLAN) provisioning to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE ports. This task only applies to GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards in
L2-over- DWDM mode.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode. To change the card mode, complete the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Note This task can only be performed on ports provisioned as NNI. See the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the SVLAN port settings. The card view appears.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > SVLAN
tabs.
Step 3 For each SVLAN shown in the table, click the check box under the Port [
port name
] table cell to include the SVLAN in that port. If you do not want the SVLAN included, uncheck the check box.
Note If no SVLANs appear in the SVLAN tab, complete the G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database.
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G383 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Quality of Service Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) value and bandwidth for QoS Class of Service (CoS) egress queues on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card port.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode and the port must have QoS enabled. Refer to the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode and the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings, if needed.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the QoS settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > QoS
tabs.
Step 3 In the Port field at the bottom of the window, choose the port where you want to provision the QoS settings.
Step 4 For each CoS egress queue, 0 through 7, define the following:
-
WRR weight—sets the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) level for the CoS egress queue. The default is 1. The range is 0 to 15, where 0 is Strict Priority.)
Note The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE define a set of eight queues, one queue for each CoS. Only one of the queues can be assigned the 0 WRR weight (Strict Priority).
-
Bandwidth—sets the bandwidth allocated for the CoS egress queue, 100 is the default. This bandwidth value is the percentage (%) of bandwidth with respect to the SFP, XFP, or port speed (100 Mbps for FE, 1 Gbps for GE, and 10 Gbps for 10GE) of the interface.
Step 5 Click
Apply
. Click
Yes
in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G470 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Class of Service (CoS) Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions Class of Service (CoS) settings on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode and the port must be in OOS state.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the CoS settings.
Step 2 Complete the following task:
Step 3 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings
Purpose
|
This task provisions the IEEE 802.1QinQ VLAN tags on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card UNI ports. QinQ tags expand the VLAN capability by tagging the tagged packets to produce a “double-tagged” Ethernet frame. For service providers the expanded VLAN allows specific services to be provided on specific VLANs for specific customers, while other types of services can be provided to other customers on other VLANs.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE must be in L2-over-DWDM mode. To change the card mode, complete the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Note This task can only be performed on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards UNI ports. (To provision the port Ethernet parameters, see the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.)
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the QinQ settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > QinQ
tabs.
Step 3 Click the
Port
field and choose the port where you want to provision QinQ.
Channel groups configured in UNI mode appear in the Port field along with the physical ports.
Step 4 Click the
Mode
field and choose one of the following modes from the drop-down list:
-
Selective—The incoming Ethernet packet is checked against the CVLAN and SVLAN table. If the CVLAN is not found, the packet is dropped. If you choose Selective, add an entry in the QinQ tab to map the administrative CVLAN to the SVLAN (if it is not same as the one used for data).
-
Transparent—All incoming packets are transported with the additional VLAN chosen in the SVLAN field. If you choose transparent, the traffic on administrative CVLAN will pass through.
Step 5 Click the
BPDU
field and choose one of the following bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) modes from the drop-down list:
-
Drop (default)—If checked, drops incoming packets with any of the following destination MAC addresses. The BPDU default can be applied for any UNI port.
– 01-80-c2-00-00-00—IEEE 802.1D
– 01-80-c2-00-00-02—Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
– 01-80-0c-cc-cc-cc—VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)
– 01-00-c-cc-cc-cc—Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) type 0x2000, VLAN Trunk Protocol (VTP) type 0x2003, Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), type 0x0104, Uni-Directional Link Detection (UDLD) type 0x111, Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) type 0x2004
-
Tunnel—If checked, transparently sends any of the destination MAC addresses listed above.
Step 6 If the Mode was set to Selective, complete the following steps. If not, continue with Step 7.
a. To add a row, click
Add
.
b. Click the
CVLAN
table and type in the CVLAN range. You can enter a single value or a range using “–” between the two ends of the range.
Note If you are using Software Release 8.5 or earlier, it is recommended that you do not specify a CVLAN range due to certain limitations in the feature.
c. Click the
SVLAN
table cell and choose an SVLAN from the drop-down list.
d. Click the
Operation
table cell and choose an operation:
– Add (default)—Adds the SVLAN on top of the CVLAN. The operation default can be applied for any UNI port.
– Translate—CVLAN is translated with the SVLAN value.
– Double Add—(GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards only) Adds an inner and an outer SVLAN to double tagged packets only. CVLAN settings are not required. If this double tagged selective operation is present on a port, no other selective operation can be present.
– Translate Add—(GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards only) CVLAN gets translated to inner SVLAN and the SVLAN is added.
Note If Double Add and Translate Add are configured on a GE_XP or a 10GE_XP card, a PROV-MISMATCH alarm is raised. Until this alarm is cleared, provisioning on the card is not possible.
Note A CVLAN with a value of 0 means “untagged packet”.
Note Two or more CVLANs cannot be translated over the same SVLAN.
e. (GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards only) Click the
COS
table cell and choose a value from the drop down list.
f. Click
Apply
.
g. Continue with Step 10.
Step 7 If the Mode was set to Transparent, in the SVLAN field, choose the SVLAN to be added to incoming packets.
Step 8 Click DSCP-Cos mapping Table to provision CoS based on DSCP for each port.
Step 9 For each DSCP, choose a CoS value from 0 to 7 and click OK.
Step 10 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G221 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This task enables MAC address learning on SVLANS for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
VLANs must already be created on the selected card.
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable MAC Address Learning. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G460 Enable MAC Address Learning on SVLANs for GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Note To perform this task, the GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode. Refer to the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode if needed.
Note MAC address learning is applicable only for GE_XPE and 10GE_XPE cards. If MAC address learning is configured on a GE_XP or a 10GE_XP card, a PROV-MISMATCH alarm is raised. Until this alarm is cleared, provisioning on the card is not possible.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XPE or 10GE_XPE card where you want to enable MAC address learning.
Step 2 Enable MAC address learning on the port. Perform the following steps:
a. Click
Provisioning
>
Ethernet
.
b. Check the
MAC Learning
check box.
Note If the per port MAC address learning is configured on a GE_XP or 10 GE_XP cards, before upgrading to a GE_XPE or 10 GE_XPE card, enable MAC address learning per SVLAN. Not doing so disables MAC address learning.
Step 3 Enable MAC address learning on the SVLAN attached to the port. Perform the following steps:
a. Click
SVLAN
>
SVLAN DB
tabs.
b. Click
Load
. This loads an SVLAN database from a network node or local file and replaces any SVLANs that are in the network view VLAN DB table.
c. Check the
MAC Learning
check box related to the SVLAN (one or more than one SVLAN) to be configured with MAC address learning.
d. Click
Store
. This records and enables the new configuration.
Step 4 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G385 Provision the MAC Filter Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Purpose
|
This task provisions the MAC address filter for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards when the cards are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode. The MAC address filter is a list of MAC addresses whose packets should be accepted or dropped.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode. To change the card mode, complete the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the MAC filter settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Security > MAC Filter
tabs.
Step 3 Click the port for which you want to create a MAC filter.
Step 4 Click
Edit
.
Step 5 In the Edit MAC Address dialog box, click
Add
. A new table entry appears with the MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Step 6 In the MAC Address Port field, type in the MAC address you want to filter over the default 00-00-00-00-00-00 address.
Step 7 If you want to add more MAC addresses, repeat Steps
5
and
6
. (Up to eight MAC addresses can be added for each port.) If not, click
OK
.
Step 8 On the MAC Filter table, provision the Allowed check box:
-
Checked—All MAC addresses different from the address(es) entered in the table will be dropped.
-
Unchecked—All MAC addresses matching the address(es) entered in the table will be dropped.
Step 9 Click
Apply
.
Step 10 Repeat Steps
3
through
9
for each port of the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card that you want to set up.
Step 11 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G237 Retrieve and Clear MAC Addresses on SVLANs for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This procedure retrieves and clears MAC addresses learned on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Caution Retrieving and clearing learned MAC addresses are CPU intensive and traffic affecting. You must clear the MAC addresses only during a scheduled maintenance window.
Note It is not possible to simultaneously retrieve learned MAC addresses from both CTC and TL1 interfaces.
Step 1 In the node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to retrieve the MAC addresses.
Step 2 To retrieve the MAC addresses learned, perform the following steps:
a. Click
Maintenance > MAC Addresses > Learned
.
b. In the SVLAN field, type a valid SVLAN range. The SVLAN range is from 1 to 4093.
c. Click
Refresh
.
The table displays the following fields:
– MAC Address—Displays the MAC address for the port.
– VLAN—Displays the VLAN identifier for the port.
– Port—Displays the port number.
Right-click the column heading to display the following options:
– Row Count—Displays the number of learned MAC addresses retrieved.
– Sort Column—Sorts the table by the column’s values.
– Hide Column—Hides the column from view.
– Reorder Columns Visibility—Displays all hidden columns.
Step 3 Click
Refresh
to refresh the list of MAC addresses learned.
Step 4 Click
Clear
to clear the MAC addresses learned on all the SVLANS of the card.
Note It is not possible to delete the MAC addresses learned on a per SVLAN basis.
Step 5 To view card MAC addresses, complete the G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G546 View Card MAC Addresses on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This task allows you to view the MAC addresses for each client and trunk port and the CPU port of the card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 To view the card MAC addresses, click
Maintenance > MAC Addresses > Card
. The MAC addresses for each client and trunk port and the CPU port are displayed.
The table displays the following fields:
-
Port—Displays the port number.
-
MAC Address—Displays the MAC address for the port.
Step 2 Return to your originating procedure.
NTP-G311 Provision the Storm Control Settings for GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This task provisions the storm control settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards when the cards are provisioned in L2-over-DWDM mode.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
None
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note To perform this task, the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card must be in L2-over-DWDM mode. To change the card mode, complete the G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the storm control settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Security > Storm Control
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings as described in
Table 6-108
.
Table 6-108 Storm Control Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) The Port number (
n
-
n
) and rate (GE or TEN_GE).
|
|
DLF Storm Control
|
Enables or disables DLF storm control on the card.
|
-
Checked—DLF storm control is enabled.
-
Unchecked—DLF storm control is disabled.
|
DLF Storm Control Threshold (pps)
|
Threshold value to set the number of unknown unicast packets per second.
|
Range: 0 to 16777215 packets per second
|
Mcast Storm Control
|
Enables or disables Multicast storm control on the card.
|
-
Checked—Multicast storm control is enabled.
-
Unchecked—Multicast
storm control is disabled.
|
Mcast Storm Control Threshold (pps)
|
Threshold value to set the number of multicast packets per second.
|
Range: 0 to 16777215 packets per second
|
Bcast Storm Control
|
Enables or disables Broadcast storm control on the card.
|
-
Checked—Broadcast storm control is enabled.
-
Unchecked—Broadcast storm control is disabled.
|
Bcast Storm Control Threshold (pps)
|
Threshold value to set the number of broadcast packets per second.
|
Range: 0 to 16777215 packets per second
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G205 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This task enables link integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
None
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable link integrity. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G509 Enable Link Integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task enables link integrity on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 From the View menu, choose
Go to Network View
.
Step 2 Create or load an SVLAN profile. To create a SVLAN profile see G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile.
Note Make sure the Link Integrity check box is selected to enable link integrity for a profile and save it to the node.
Step 3 Associate the SVLAN profile (with Link Integrity enabled) to a SVLAN on a port. To do this perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card. The card view appears.
b. Click the
Provisioning > Profiles Mapping > SVLAN
tabs.
c. Enter the SVLANs or SVLAN range in the
SVLAN to View
text box.
A table appears that displays SVLANs and available ports. The SVLAN profiles that was created must be applied to a SVLAN and a port. However, make sure the SVLAN has already been associated with the port via the QinQ tab (For information on how to associate a SVLAN to a port, see the G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings).
d. Select the SVLAN for a port and choose the available SVLAN profile from the drop-box.
e. Click
Apply
.
Step 4 AIS action must be set on a per-UNI port basis. Select
None
or
Squelch
from the AIS action drop-down list. For detailed instructions, see the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G289 Provision CVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Purpose
|
This task provisions CVLAN rate limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note You cannot provision CVLAN rate limiting on channel groups.
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to provision CVLAN rate limiting. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 From the View menu, choose
Go to Network View
.
Step 3 Create or load a CVLAN profile by setting Committed Info Rate, Committed Burst, Excess Info, Excess Burst. To create a CVLAN Profile see G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile.
Step 4 Associate the CVLAN profile to a CVLAN on a UNI port. To do this perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card. The card view appears.
b. Click the
Provisioning > Profiles Mapping > CVLAN
tabs.
c. Enter the CVLANs or CVLAN range in the
CVLANS to View
text box.
A table appears that displays CVLANs and available ports. The CVLAN profiles that were created must be applied to a CVLAN and port. However, make sure the CVLAN has already been associated with the port via the QinQ tab (For information on how to associate a CVLAN profile to a UNI port, see G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings).
d. Select the CVLAN for a given port and choose the available CVLAN profile from the drop-down list.
e. Click
Apply
.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G208 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Purpose
|
This task provisions SVLAN rate limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable SVLAN rate limiting. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G515 Provision SVLAN Rate Limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC
Purpose
|
This task provisions SVLAN rate limiting on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 From the View menu, choose
Go to Network View
.
Step 2 Create or load a SVLAN profile by setting Committed Info Rate, Committed Burst, Excess Info, Excess Burst. To create a SVLAN Profile see G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile.
Step 3 Associate the SVLAN profile to a SVLAN on a port. To do this, perform the following steps:
a. In node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE card. The card view appears.
b. Click the
Provisioning > Profiles Mapping > SVLAN
tabs.
c. Enter the SVLANs or SVLAN range in the
SVLAN to View
text box.
A table appears that displays SVLANs and available ports. The SVLAN profiles that were created must be applied to a SVLAN and port. However, make sure the SVLAN has already been associated with the port via the QinQ tab (For information on how to associate a SVLAN profile to a UNI port, see G384 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE QinQ Settings and to a NNI port see G382 Add and Remove SVLANS to/from GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE NNI Ports).
d. Select the SVLAN for a given port and choose the available SVLAN profile from the drop-down list.
e. Click
Apply
.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G471 Create a SVLAN or CVLAN Profile
Purpose
|
This task creates an SVLAN profile.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note You cannot associate SVLAN or CVLAN profiles to channel groups. You can associate a CVLAN profile only to a UNI port.
Step 1 From the View menu, choose
Go to Network View
.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > SVLAN > Profiles
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Add
and a profile is added to the Profiles tab. Modify any of the settings as follows:
-
Name—The profile name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters.
-
Committed Info Rate—Sets the guaranteed information rate as provided by the service provider service-level agreement. The default value is 100 and the range is 0 to 100 percent.
-
Committed Burst—Sets the maximum number of bits that will be transferred per second.
-
Peak Info Rate—Sets the maximum information rate as provided by the service provider service-level agreement. The default value is 100 and the range is 0 to 100 percent. However, the value must be greater or equal to than the Committed Info Rate.
-
Peak Burst Size—The maximum number of bits that are credited for later transfer in the event the committed burst rate cannot be transmitted.
-
Link Integrity—Enables link integrity for the SVLAN profile. Do not check this check box if you are creating a CVLAN profile.
Note When you set the Committed Info Rate above 40% on 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards, the Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size must be set to at least 32K. The Committed Burst Size and Excess Burst Size can be increased based on the packet size and Committed Info Rate value.
Step 4 Click
Store
.
Step 5 In the Store Profile(s) dialog box, choose one of the following:
-
To Node(s)—Stores the SVLAN profile at one or more network nodes. Choose the network nodes where you want to store the SVLAN profile. To choose more than one node, press the Shift key, or click Select All.
-
To File—Stores the SVLAN profile in a file. Enter a file name, then click Browse to navigate to a local or network drive where you want to store the file.
Step 6 Click
OK
.
Step 7 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G204 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards
Purpose
|
This procedure enables Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on a per-SVLAN basis on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
None
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable IGMP snooping. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
-
G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC.
-
G220 Enable IGMP Snooping on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
-
G217 Enable IGMP Fast-Leave Processing on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
-
G219 Enable IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using PCLI.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G511 Enable IGMP Snooping, IGMP Fast Leave and IGMP Report Suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Cards Using CTC
Purpose
|
This procedure explains how to enable IGMP snooping, IGMP fast leave and IGMP report suppression on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards using CTC.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 From the View menu, choose
Go to Network View
.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > SVLAN > SVLAN DB
tabs. Click
Load
to load the SVLANs on the card where IGMP must be enabled.
Step 3 For each SVLAN shown in the table, select the following:
-
IGMP—Check the IGMP check box to enable IGMP for the selected SVLAN.
-
IGMP Fast Leave—Checking the IGMP Fast Leave causes the switch to immediately remove a port from the IP multicast group when it detects an IGMP, version 2 (IGMPv2) leave message on that port.
-
IGMP Suppression—Check the IGMP Suppression check box to enable a single IGMP report to be sent to each multicast group in response to a single query.
Step 4 Click
Store
SVLAN DB
.
Step 5 In the Store SVLAN DB dialog box, choose one of the following:
-
To Node/Shelf/Card—Select the node and shelf. All the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards in L2 over DWDM mode are displayed. Select the card where you want to store the SVLAN DB.
-
Stores the SVLAN database at one or more network nodes. Choose the network nodes where you want to store the SVLAN database. To choose more than one node, press the Shift key, or click
Select All
.
-
To File—Stores the SVLAN database in a file. Enter a file name, then click
Browse
to navigate to a local or network drive where you want to store the file.
-
Select the card on which you want to save the changes made in step 3.
Step 6 Click
OK
.
Note If you want to add the multicast-capable ports to the forwarding table for every IP multicast, select the IGMP Static Router Port check box as described in the G380 Provision the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Ethernet Settings.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G206 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card
Purpose
|
This procedure enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) on GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
None
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to enable IGMP snooping. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Complete the following tasks, as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G513 Enable MVR on a GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Using CTC
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode), or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to enable MVR. The card view appears.
Note At least one SVLAN must be configured on the card.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning
>
MVR
tabs. The MVR Settings tab appears.
Step 3 Check the
Enabled
check box and enter the following information:
-
IGMP CVLAN—Check box to enable IGMP snooping on CVLAN. This check box is enabled only when MVR is enabled through the Enabled check box.
-
Multicast SVLAN—Select the MVR SVLAN ID. The default value is the SVLAN with the lowest ID configured on the card. The drop box lists all the SVLANs on the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card.
Note SVLAN selected here can not be used for UNI port, make sure that the corresponding SVLAN on the NNI port is checked.
-
Multicast Address—Sets the specified multicast group address as the MVR multicast group. The default address is 239.255.255.255 and the range is 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Except the subrange [224-239].[0/128].0.x.
-
Count—Sets the range of any additional multicast group addresses. The default is 1, and range is 1 to 256.
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G386 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Trunk Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card trunk port alarm and TCA thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards have two trunk ports. The GE_XP and GE_XPE trunk ports are 21-1 and 22-1 on the card graphic and 21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table. The 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE card trunk ports are 3-1 and 4-1 on the card graphic and 3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk) on the Optics Thresholds table.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click
TCA
and then click
Refresh
. When TCA is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the trunk port TCA thresholds are provisioned as shown in
Table 6-109
. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Table 6-109 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Trunk Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
XFP WDM no FEC
|
–7
|
–23
|
6
|
–4
|
XFP WDM standard FEC
|
–7
|
–27
|
6
|
–4
|
XFP WDM Enhanced FEC
|
–7
|
–27
|
6
|
–4
|
Step 5 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the trunk port alarm thresholds are provisioned as shown in
Table 6-110
. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Table 6-110 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Trunk Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
XFP WDM no FEC
|
–5
|
–26
|
5
|
–3
|
XFP WDM standard FEC
|
–5
|
–30
|
5
|
–3
|
XFP WDM Enhanced FEC
|
–5
|
–30
|
5
|
–3
|
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
Step 8 Repeat Steps
3
through
7
to provision the second trunk port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G387 Provision the Gigabit Ethernet Client Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the client port alarm and TCA thresholds for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G277 Provision a Multirate PPM
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
Required
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The GE_XP card has 20 client ports. The ports are 1-1 through 20-1 on the card graphic and 1 (Client) through 20 (Client) on the Optics Thresholds table. The 10GE_XP card has 2 client ports. The ports are 1-1 and 2-1 on the card graphic and 1 (Client) and 2 (Client) on the Optics Thresholds table.
Note The hardware device that plugs into a TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or ADM-10G card faceplate to provide a fiber interface to the card is called a Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP or XFP). In CTC, SFPs and XFPs are called pluggable port modules (PPMs). SFPs/XFPs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a port to link the port with the fiber-optic network. Multirate PPMs have provisionable port rates and payloads. For more information about SFPs and XFPs, refer to the “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the client port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs. The TCA thresholds are shown by default.
Step 3 If TCA is not selected, click
TCA
and then click
Refresh
. When TCA is selected, continue with Step 4.
Step 4 Verify the client port TCA thresholds are provisioned as shown in
Table 6-111
. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Table 6-111 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card Client Interface TCA Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
10GE LAN PHY 10GBASE-LR
|
1
|
–14
|
5
|
–12
|
1000Base-SX (1Gbps)
|
0
|
–17
|
3
|
–16
|
1000Base-LX 1
|
–3
|
–20
|
3
|
–16
|
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Step 5 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Step 6 Verify the client port Alarm thresholds are provisioned as shown in
Table 6-112
. Provision new thresholds as needed by double-clicking the threshold value you want to change, deleting it, entering a new value, and hitting
Enter
.
Table 6-112 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card Client Interface Alarm Thresholds
Pluggable Port Module (XFP)
|
|
|
|
|
10GE LAN PHY 10GBASE-LR
|
3
|
–16
|
1
|
–8
|
1000Base-SX (1Gbps)
|
3
|
–20
|
–2
|
–12
|
1000Base-SX (2Gbps)1
|
3
|
–18
|
–2
|
–12
|
1000Base-LX 1
|
0
|
–23
|
–1
|
–12
|
Step 7 Click
Apply
.
Step 8 Repeat Steps
3
through
7
to provision each additional client port.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G388 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card RMON Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task changes the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card RMON threshold settings.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), display the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the RMON thresholds.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > RMON Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose an individual port, or choose
All
to provision RMON thresholds for all ports.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See
Table 6-113
for a list of available Ethernet RMON variables.
Note Variable descriptions were obtained from the following Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Requests for Comment (RFCs): RFC 3635, RFC 2233, and RFC 1757. Refer to the RFCs for additional information.
Table 6-113 Gigabit Ethernet RMON Variables
|
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of receive packets.
|
ifInUcastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
|
ifInDiscards
|
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
ifOutOctets
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmitted packets.
|
ifOutMulticastPkts
|
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both group and functional addresses.
|
ifOutBroadcastPkts
|
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
|
ifOutDiscards
|
The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
|
IfOutErrors
|
Number of outbound packets or transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
|
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
|
dot3ControlInUnknownOpCode
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode that is not supported by this device.
|
dot3InPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
dot33StatsFCSErrors
|
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.
|
dot3StatsFrameTooLong
|
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
|
dot3ControlInUnknownOpCode
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface that contain an opcode that is not supported by this device.
|
dot3InPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC control frames received on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
dot3OutPauseFrames
|
A count of MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation.
|
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors
|
Total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsFragments
|
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral.
|
etherStatsPkts
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets,broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1519to1522Octets
|
The total number of packets (including error packets) received that were between 1519 and 1522 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Note This variable is supported only on client ports.
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (for untagged packets) or 1522 octets (for tagged packets) (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (for untagged packets) or 1522 octets (for tagged packets) (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and were not an integral number of octets in length or had a bad FCS.
|
etherStatsOctets
|
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, indicate whether the event will be triggered by the rising threshold, the falling threshold, or both the rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list,
choose either
Relative
or
Absolute
. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Type in an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Type in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click
OK
.
Step 12 To view all RMON thresholds, click
Show All RMON thresholds
. If not, continue with Step 12
Step 13 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G389 Change the Gigabit Ethernet Optical Transport Network Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the optical transport network (OTN) settings for the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > OTN
tabs, then choose one of the following subtabs:
OTN Lines
,
G.709 Thresholds
,
FEC Thresholds
, or
Trail Trace Identifier
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables
6-114
through
6-117
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End; 15 Min and 1 Day; and SM and PM independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-114
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines tab.
Table 6-114 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card OTN Line Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number and description:
|
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk). 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk). GE_XP and GE_XPE cards
|
ITU-T G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709.
|
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines to forward error correction (FEC).
|
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
Table 6-115
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds tab.
Table 6-115 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number and description:
|
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk). 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk). GE_XP and GE_XPE cards
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Can be set for Near End or Far End, for 15-minute or one-day intervals, or for SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk). Select a bullet and click
Refresh
.
|
Table 6-116
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > FEC Threshold tab.
Table 6-116 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, or 10GE_XPE Card FEC Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number and description:
|
3 (Trunk) and 4 (Trunk). 10GE_XP and 10GE_XPE cards
21 (Trunk) and 22 (Trunk). GE_XP and GE_XPE cards
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Sets the value for bit errors corrected.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Sets the value for uncorrectable words.
|
Numeric. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-117
describes the values on the Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier tab.
Table 6-117 GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPECard Trail Trace Identifier Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
2
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
-
Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not disabled)
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G314 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card on a FAPS Ring
Purpose
|
This procedure adds a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card on a FAPS ring.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
Installed GE_XP or 10GE_XP cards.
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
“NTP-G15 Install the Common Control Cards” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 Hardware Installation Guide
G179 Install the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, ADM-10G, and OTU2_XP Cards
G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card on a FAPS ring. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 Perform any of the following tasks as needed:
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G687 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Facing Master Card on a FAPS Ring
Purpose
|
This procedure adds a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card that faces the master card on a FAPS ring.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card on a FAPS ring.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6.
Step 3 Insert the new GE-XP card with XFP on the slot.
Step 4 Change the GE_XP card mode to L2-over-DWDM. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 5 Create and store an SVLAN database on the new GE_XP card. See G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database.
Step 6 Enable FAPS protection on the new card.
Step 7 Attach SVLAN to the trunk ports of the new card.
Step 8 Choose OOS,DSBLD from the Admin State column for port 22 on the master card that is facing toward the new card. This action places port 22 in the blocking state and port 21 in the forwarding state.
FAPS configuration mismatch alarm is raised on the master card.
Step 9 Switch the traffic to the protect path.
Step 10 Choose OOS,DSBLD from the Admin State column for port 21 on the slave card that is facing toward the new card.
Step 11 Connect the fiber from the slave card (that is facing toward the new card) to the new card in segment B.
Step 12 Connect the fiber from the master card to the new card in segment A.
Step 13 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 21 on the slave card that is facing toward the new card.
Step 14 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 22 on the new card to bring up segment B.
Step 15 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 21 on the new card.
Note The FAPS state of the new card will be in the forwarding state for both the ports and port 21 of the slave card will be in the blocking state.
Step 16 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 22 on the master card to bring up segment A.
Note The FAPS state of port 21 on the master card will be in the blocking state and port 22 will be in the forwarding state. The trunk ports of the remaining GE_XP cards will be in the forwarding state. The port 21 of the slave card (that is facing toward the new card) will change to the forwarding state.
Step 17 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G688 Add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP Card Between the Slave Cards on a FAPS Ring
Purpose
|
This procedure adds a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card between the two slave cards on a FAPS ring.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to add a GE_XP or 10GE_XP card on a FAPS ring.
Step 2 Verify that the GE_XP or 10GE_XP card is installed according to the requirements specified in Table 4-6.
Step 3 Insert the new GE-XP card with XFP on the slot.
Step 4 Change the GE_XP card mode to L2-over-DWDM. See G379 Change the GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, and 10GE_XPE Card Mode.
Step 5 Create and store an SVLAN database on the new GE_XP card. See G421 Create and Store an SVLAN Database.
Step 6 Attach SVLAN to the trunk ports of the new card.
Step 7 Choose OOS,DSBLD from the Admin State column for port 22 on both the slave cards that are facing toward the new card.
Step 8 Connect the fiber from the slave card to the new card in segment B.
Step 9 Connect the fiber from the master card to the new card in segment A.
Step 10 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 22 on the slave card.
Step 11 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 22 on the new card to bring up segment B.
Step 12 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 21 on the new card.
Step 13 Choose IS from the Admin State column for port 21 on the slave card to bring up segment A.
Step 14 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G197 Provision the OTU2_XP Card Line Settings, PM Parameters, and Thresholds
Step 1 Complete the G46 Log into CTC at the node where you want to change the card settings. If you are already logged in, continue with Step 2.
Step 2 As needed, complete the G103 Back Up the Database to preserve the existing transmission settings.
Step 3 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card.
Step 4 Verify the card mode:
a. Display the OTU2_XP card in card view.
b. Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
c. Verify that the card mode is set to the mode designated by your site plan:
– Transponder
– Standard Regen
– Enhanced FEC
– Mixed
– 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
If the card mode is set correctly, continue with
Step 6
. If not, complete the G452 Change the OTU2_XP Card Mode.
Step 5 Refer to the “OTU2_XP Card Configuration Rules” section in chapter “Transponder and Muxponder Cards” in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
before performing any task listed in
Step 6
.
Step 6 Perform any of the following tasks as needed.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
DLP-G453 Change the OTU2_XP Card Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the card settings for the OTU2_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the card settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tab.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-118
.
Table 6-118 OTU2_XP Card Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Card Configuration
|
Sets the card configuration.
|
-
Transponder
-
Standard Regen
-
Enhanced FEC
-
Mixed
-
10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
|
-
Transponder
-
Standard Regen
-
Enhanced FEC
-
Mixed
-
10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy
|
Port Mode
|
Sets the port configuration when the card configuration is set as Mixed. For card configurations other than Mixed, this is a display-only parameter. You can configure Ports 2 and 4 as port mode, when the card is in 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode.
|
-
Transponder
-
Standard Regen
|
-
Transponder
-
Standard Regen
|
Termination Mode
|
Sets the mode of operation. (This option is only available for SONET/SDH payloads). For Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC card configurations, this is a display-only parameter.
|
|
-
Transparent
-
Regeneration Section (RS)
-
Multiplex Section (MS)
|
Framing Type
|
(Display only) The card framing type, either SONET or SDH.
|
—
|
—
|
AIS/Squelch
|
Sets the transparent termination mode configuration.
|
|
|
Regen Line Name
|
Sets the regeneration line name.
|
—
|
—
|
ODU Transparency
|
Sets the ODU overhead byte configuration. For Transponder card configuration, this is a display-only parameter.
|
-
Transparent Standard Use
-
Cisco Extended Use
|
-
Transparent Standard Use
-
Cisco Extended Use
|
Proactive Protection Regen
|
Enables or disables the proactive protection regen mode.
|
|
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G454 Change the OTU2_XP Line Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line settings for OTU2_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the line settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Ports/SONET/Ethernet
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-119
.
Table 6-119 OTU2_XP Line Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number.
|
-
1-1 (OC192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC)
-
2-1 (OC192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC)
-
3-1 (OC192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC)
-
4-1 (OC192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC)
-
IB_5G
|
-
1-1 (STM-64/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC)
-
2-1 (STM-64/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC)
-
3-1 (STM-64/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC)
-
4-1 (STM-64/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC)
-
IB_5G
|
Port Name
|
Provides the ability to assign the specified port a name.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
User-defined. Name can be up to 32 alphanumeric/special characters. Blank by default.
See the G104 Assign a Name to a Port.
|
Admin State
|
Sets the port service state. For more information about administrative states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS
-
IS,AINS
-
OOS,DSBLD
-
OOS,MT
|
-
Unlocked
-
Unlocked,automaticInService
-
Locked,disabled
-
Locked,maintenance
|
Service State
|
(Display only) Identifies the autonomously generated state that gives the overall condition of the port. Service states appear in the format: Primary State-Primary State Qualifier, Secondary State. For more information about service states, refer to the “Administrative and Service States” appendix in the
Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual
.
|
-
IS-NR
-
OOS-AU,AINS
-
OOS-MA,DSBLD
-
OOS-MA,MT
|
-
Unlocked-enabled
-
Unlocked-disabled,
automaticInService
-
Locked-enabled,disabled
-
Locked-enabled,maintenance
|
ALS Mode
|
Sets the ALS function mode. The DWDM transmitter supports ALS according to ITU-T G.644 (06/99). ALS can be disabled, or it can be set for one of three mode options.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
-
Disabled (default): ALS is off; the laser is not automatically shut down when traffic outages (LOS) occur.
-
Auto Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. It automatically restarts when the conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart: ALS is on; the laser automatically shuts down when traffic outages (LOS) occur. However, the laser must be manually restarted when conditions that caused the outage are resolved.
-
Manual Restart for Test: Manually restarts the laser for testing.
|
Reach
|
Displays the optical reach distance of the client/trunk ports.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
The Reach options depend on the traffic type that has been selected.
|
Wavelength
|
Displays the wavelength of the client/trunk ports.
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1610 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) spacing
Note Supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**).
|
-
First Tunable Wavelength
-
Further wavelengths: 850 nm through 1610 nm, 100-GHz ITU spacing; CWDM spacing
Note Supported wavelengths are marked by asterisks (**).
|
AINS Soak
|
Sets the automatic in-service soak period. Double-click the time and use the up and down arrows to change settings.
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes in service (IS) automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
-
Duration of valid input signal, in hh.mm format, after which the card becomes IS automatically
-
0 to 48 hours, 15-minute increments
|
SF BER
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] only) Sets the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
|
SD BER
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] only) Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
|
Type
|
(SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI] only) The optical transport type.
|
Note When Type is set to SDH in a SONET (ANSI) provisioning, SDCC or LDCC on OTU2_XP cards cannot be provisioned.
|
|
MTU
|
The maximum size of the Ethernet frames accepted by the port. The port must be in OOS/locked state.
|
-
1548 bytes
-
Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
|
-
1548 bytes
-
Jumbo (64 to 9,216 bytes)
|
Incoming MAC Address
|
Sets the incoming MAC address.
|
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format.
|
Value of MAC address. Six bytes in hexadecimal format.
|
Flow Control (Only when the card is in 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode)
|
Enables/disables flow control messaging with its peer port. When enabled, the port can send and receive PAUSE frames when buffer congestion occurs. When disabled, no PAUSE frames are transmitted and the PAUSE frames received are discarded.
|
-
ON (default)—Flow control is enabled.
-
OFF—Flow control is disabled.
|
-
ON (default)—Flow control is enabled.
-
OFF—Flow control is disabled.
|
Client Distance (Only when the card is in 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode)
|
Sets the fiber distance between the client of OTU2_XP card and the LAN port that is connected to the OTU2_XP client port.
|
|
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G455 Change the OTU2_XP Line Section Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the line section trace settings for the OTU2_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the section trace settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line > Section Trace
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-120
.
Table 6-120 OTU2_XP Section Trace Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
-
1-1 (OC192)
-
2-1 (OC192)
-
3-1 (OC192)
-
4-1 (OC192)
|
-
1-1 (STM-64)
-
2-1 (STM-64)
-
3-1 (STM-64)
-
4-1 (STM-64)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
|
Disable AIS/RDI on TIM-S
|
If a TIM on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no alarm indication signal is sent to downstream nodes if this box is checked.
This is a display-only parameter under the following conditions:
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
-
Checked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is disabled)
-
Unchecked (AIS/RDI on TIM-S is not disabled)
|
Transmit Section Trace String Size
|
Sets the trace string size.
|
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh check box to automatically refresh the display every 5 seconds.
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G456 Change the OTU2_XP Line Thresholds for SONET or SDH Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for the OTU2_XP card carrying SONET or SDH payload.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the line threshold settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds
> SONET Thresholds (ANSI) or
SDH Thresholds
(ETSI) tabs.
Note If you have enabled 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy on the OTU2_XP card, the STS option is automatically enabled.
Only near end STS thresholds are supported. No STS thresholds are support for Far End.
Step 3 Modify any of the OTU2_XP card path threshold settings on a LAN Phy to WAN Phy mode, as seen in
Table 6-121
.
Table 6-121 OTU2_XP Card Path Threshold Settings on a 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Mode
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number.
|
-
Ports 3-1 (Trunk), STS-1
-
Ports 4-1 (Trunk), STS-1
|
-
Port 3-1 (Trunk), VC4-1
-
Port 4-1 (Trunk), VC4-1
|
Step 4 Modify any of the OTU2_XP Card Line Threshold settings described in
Table 6-122
Table 6-122 OTU2_XP Card Line Threshold Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
(Display only) Port number
|
-
1-1 (OC192)
-
2-1 (OC192)
-
3-1 (OC192)
-
4-1 (OC192)
|
-
1-1 (STM-64)
-
2-1 (STM-64)
-
3-1 (STM-64)
-
4-1 (STM-64)
|
CV
|
Coding violations
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Line or Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
ES
|
Errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Line or Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Line or Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Failure count
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Line or Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
(Line or Multiplex Section only) Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Line or Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—(Near end only) Multiplex Section or Regeneration Section
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G457 Provision the OTU2_XP Port Alarm and TCA Thresholds
Purpose
|
This task provisions the OTU2_XP port alarm and threshold crossing alert (TCA) thresholds.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the trunk port alarm and TCA settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Optics Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Under Types, verify that the TCA radio button is checked. If not, select it, then click
Refresh
.
Step 4 Refer to
Table 6-123
to provision the port TCA thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Note Do not modify the Laser Bias parameters.
Table 6-123 OTU2_XP Port TCA Thresholds
|
|
|
|
|
1-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC/IB_5G)
|
1.0 dBm
|
–14.0 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
–12.0 dBm
|
2-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC/IB_5G)
|
1.0 dBm
|
–14.0 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
–12.0 dBm
|
3-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC/IB_5G)
|
1.0 dBm
|
–14.0 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
–12.0 dBm
|
4-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC/IB_5G)
|
1.0 dBm
|
–14.0 dBm
|
5.0 dBm
|
–12.0 dBm
|
Step 5 Click
Apply
.
Step 6 Under Types, click the
Alarm
radio button and click
Refresh
.
Step 7 Refer to
Table 6-124
to provision the port alarm thresholds for RX Power High, RX Power Low, TX Power High, and TX Power Low.
Note You must modify 15 Min and 1 Day independently. To do so, choose the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-124 OTU2_XP Port Alarm Thresholds
|
|
|
|
|
1-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC/IB_5G)
|
3.0 dBm
|
–16.0 dBm
|
1.0 dBm
|
–8.0 dBm
|
2-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC/IB_5G)
|
3.0 dBm
|
–16.0 dBm
|
1.0 dBm
|
–8.0 dBm
|
3-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC/IB_5G)
|
3.0 dBm
|
–16.0 dBm
|
1.0 dBm
|
–8.0 dBm
|
4-1 (OC-192/10G Ethernet WAN Phy/10G Ethernet LAN Phy/10G FC/IB_5G)
|
3.0 dBm
|
–16.0 dBm
|
1.0 dBm
|
–8.0 dBm
|
Step 8 Click
Apply
.
Step 9 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G462 Change the OTU2_XP Line RMON Thresholds for the 10G Ethernet and 10G FC Payloads
Purpose
|
This task changes the line threshold settings for OTU2_XP card carrying the 10G Ethernet or 10G FC payloads.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the line threshold in the card view.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Line Thresholds > RMON Thresholds
tabs.
Step 3 Click
Create
. The Create Threshold dialog box appears.
Step 4 From the Port drop-down list, choose the applicable port.
Step 5 From the Variable drop-down list, choose an Ethernet variable. See
Table 6-125
and
Table 6-126
for a list of available Ethernet variables.
Table 6-125 OTU2_XP Card 10G Ethernet Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
rxTotalPkts
|
Total number of received packets. rxTotalPkts increments for 10G FC payload packets with FCS errors. However, 10G Ethernet LAN Phy payload packets with CRC errors are not counted.
|
ifInMulticastPkts
|
Number of multicast frames received error free.
|
ifInBroadcastPkts
|
Number of packets, delivered by a sublayer to an higher sublayer, that were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer.
|
ifInErrors
|
Number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
|
dot3StatsFCSErrors
|
Number of frames with frame check errors, that is, there is an integral number of octets, but an incorrect Frame Check Sequence (FCS).
|
etherStatsUndersizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsFragments
|
Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.
|
etherStatsPkts64Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets
|
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets
|
Total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
etherStatsBroadcastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
|
etherStatsMulticastPkts
|
Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
|
etherStatsOversizePkts
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
|
etherStatsJabbers
|
Total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
|
etherStatsOctets
|
Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
|
rxControlFrames
|
Number of MAC control frames passed by the MAC sublayer to the MAC control sublayer.
|
Table 6-126 OTU2_XP Card 10G FC Variables
|
|
ifInOctets
|
Total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTruncated
|
Total number of fiber channel frames received that are less than the minimum 36-byte frame. This is inclusive of header, SOF, EOF, and CRC with no data bytes.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong
|
Total number of fiber channel frames received that exceed the maximum 2148-byte frame. This is inclusive of header, SOF, EOF, CRC, and data bytes.
|
mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC
|
Total number of fiber channel frames received with CRC errors.
|
ifInDiscards
|
The number of inbound packets, which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.
|
ifOutOctets
|
Total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.1
|
mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC
|
Number of transmitted data frames with payload CRC errors when HDLC framing is used.1
|
transmitPauseFrames
|
Number of transmitted pause frames.1
|
txTotalPkts
|
Total number of transmit packets.1
|
Step 6 From the Alarm Type drop-down list, choose the event triggers. The available options are rising threshold, falling threshold, or rising and falling thresholds.
Step 7 From the Sample Type drop-down list,
choose either
Relative
or
Absolute
. Relative restricts the threshold to use the number of occurrences in the user-set sample period. Absolute sets the threshold to use the total number of occurrences, regardless of time period.
Step 8 Enter an appropriate number of seconds for the Sample Period.
Step 9 Enter in the appropriate number of occurrences for the Rising Threshold.
For a rising type of alarm, the measured value must move from below the falling threshold to above the rising threshold. For example, if a network is running below a rising threshold of 1000 collisions every 15 seconds and a problem causes 1001 collisions in 15 seconds, the excess occurrences trigger an alarm.
Step 10 Enter the appropriate number of occurrences in the Falling Threshold field. In most cases a falling threshold is set lower than the rising threshold.
A falling threshold is the counterpart to a rising threshold. When the number of occurrences is above the rising threshold and then drops below a falling threshold, it resets the rising threshold. For example, when the network problem that caused 1001 collisions in 15 seconds subsides and creates only 799 collisions in 15 seconds, occurrences fall below a falling threshold of 800 collisions. This resets the rising threshold so that if network collisions again spike over a 1000 per 15-second period, an event again triggers when the rising threshold is crossed. An event is triggered only the first time a rising threshold is exceeded (otherwise, a single network problem might cause a rising threshold to be exceeded multiple times and cause a flood of events).
Step 11 Click
OK
.
Note To view all RMON thresholds, click Show All RMON thresholds.
Step 12 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G458 Change the OTU2_XP OTN Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the OTN line settings for the OTU2_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the OTN settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > OTN
tabs. Then click one of the following subtabs:
OTN Lines
,
ITU-T G.709 Thresholds
,
FEC Thresholds
,
Trail Trace Identifier,
or
Proactive Protection Regen
.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in Tables
6-29
through
6-32
.
Note You must modify Near End and Far End independently, 15 Min and 1 Day independently, and SM and PM independently. To do so, select the appropriate radio button and click Refresh.
Table 6-127
describes the values on the
Provisioning > OTN > OTN Lines
tabs.
Table 6-127 OTU2_XP Card OTN Lines Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
—
|
ITU-T
G.709 OTN
|
Sets the OTN lines according to ITU-T G.709. Check the box to enable.
|
|
FEC
|
Sets the OTN lines FEC mode. Enhanced FEC mode can be enabled to provide greater range and lower bit error rate.
|
-
Disable—FEC is off.
-
Standard—Standard FEC is on.
-
Enhanced—Enhanced FEC is on.
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate.
|
|
SF BER
|
(Display only) Indicates the signal fail bit error rate.
|
|
No Fixed Stuff
|
Sets the insertion of stuffing bytes. This parameter only applies to 10G Ethernet LAN Phy signals in transponder card configuration. This is a display-only parameter for all other card configurations.
When the “No Fixed Stuff” parameter is disabled, the bit rate is 11.09 Gbps.
When the “No Fixed Stuff” parameter is enabled, the bit rate is 11.05 Gbps.
|
|
Table 6-128
describes the values on the
Provisioning > OTN > ITU-T G.709 Thresholds
tab.
Table 6-128 OTU2_XP Card ITU-T G.709 Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
—
|
ES
|
Severely errored seconds. Two types of thresholds can be asserted. Selecting the SM (OTUk) radio button selects FEC, overhead management, and PM using OTUk. Selecting the PM radio button selects path PM using ODUk.
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
Note SM (OTUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel transport unit order of k overhead frame used for management and performance monitoring. PM (ODUk) is the ITU-T G.709 optical channel data unit order of k overhead frame unit used for path performance monitoring.
|
SES
|
Severely errored seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
UAS
|
Unavailable seconds
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
BBE
|
Background block errors
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
FC
|
Failure counter
|
Numeric. Threshold display options include:
-
Direction—Near End or Far End
-
Interval—15 Min (minutes) or 1 day
-
Types—SM (OTUk) or PM (ODUk)
Choose an option in each category and click
Refresh
.
|
Table 6-129
describes the values on the
Provisioning > OTN > FEC Thresholds
tab.
Table 6-129 OTU2_XP Card FEC Threshold Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and optional name.
|
—
|
Bit Errors Corrected
|
Displays the number of bit errors corrected during the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Uncorrectable Words
|
Displays the number of uncorrectable words in the selected time period.
|
Numeric display. Can be set for 15-minute or one-day intervals.
|
Table 6-130
describes the values on the
Provisioning > OTN > Trail Trace Identifier
tab.
Note You cannot change the Path Trail Trace Identifier settings when the OTU2_XP card is in the Standard Regen mode, and if the ODU transparency is set to “Transparent Standard Use”.
You can change the Path Trail Trace Identifier settings when the OTU2_XP card is in the Standard Regen mode, and if the ODU transparency is set to “Cisco Extended Use”.
Table 6-130 OTU2_XP Card Trail Trace Identifier Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
—
|
Level
|
Sets the level.
|
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
Disable FDI on TTIM
|
If a Trace Identifier Mismatch on Section overhead alarm arises because of a J0 overhead string mismatch, no Forward Defect Indication (FDI) signal is sent to the downstream nodes if this box is checked.
|
-
Checked (FDI on TTIM is disabled)
-
Unchecked (FDI on TTIM is not enabled)
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size;
trail trace identifier is 64 bytes in length.
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh every 5 sec check box to keep this panel updated.
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 minutes.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Table 6-131
describes the values on the
Provisioning > OTN > Proactive Protection Regen
tabs.
Note Proactive protection regen is supported on ports of OTU2_XP only in Standard Regen and Enhanced FEC mode.
Table 6-131 OTU2_XP Card Proactive Protection Regen Settings
|
|
|
Port
|
(Display only) Displays the port number and name (optional).
|
—
|
Trigger threshold
|
Sets the maximum BER threshold to trigger proactive protection.
|
-
1E-3
-
9E-4 to 1E-4
-
9E-5 to 1E-5
-
9E-6 to 1E-6
-
9E-7 to 1E-7
|
Trigger window (ms)
|
Sets the duration for which BER is monitored before triggering the proactive protection.
The trigger window value must be a multiple of:
-
10 ms for trigger thresholds between 1E-3 and 6E-6
-
100 ms for trigger threshold between 5E-6 to 1E-7
Trigger window must be less than or equal to 10000 ms.
|
Time in milliseconds.
|
Revert Threshold
|
Sets the revert threshold value of BER.
Note Revert Threshold settings must be less than the Trigger Threshold values.
|
-
1E-4
-
9E-5 to 1E-5
-
9E-6 to 1E-6
-
9E-7 to 1E-7
-
9E-8 to 5E-8
|
Revert window (ms)
|
Sets the duration for which BER is monitored for settings that are less than the revert threshold value before which proactive protection provided to the router is removed.
Revert Window value must be at least 2000ms and a multiple of:
-
10ms for a Revert Threshold of 1E-4 to 6E-7
-
100ms for a Revert Threshold of 5E-7 to 5E-8.
The revert window must be less than or equal to 10000ms.
|
Time in milliseconds.
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G523 Change the OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings
Purpose
|
This task changes the path trace settings for the OTU2_XP card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the path trace settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Path> J1 Path Trace
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-132
.
Table 6-132 OTU2_XP Path Trace Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
|
-
3-1 (STM-64)
-
4-1 (STM-64)
|
Received Trace Mode
|
Sets the trace mode.
|
|
|
Transmit
|
Displays the current transmit string; sets a new transmit string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Expected
|
Displays the current expected string; sets a new expected string. You can click the button on the right to change the display. Its title changes, based on the current display mode. Click
Hex
to change the display to hexadecimal (button changes to ASCII); click
ASCII
to change the display to ASCII (button changes to Hex).
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Received
|
(Display only) Displays the current received string. You can click Refresh to manually refresh this display, or check the Auto-refresh check box to automatically refresh the display every 5 seconds.
|
String of trace string size
|
String of trace string size
|
Auto-refresh
|
If checked, automatically refreshes the display every 5 seconds.
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Checked/unchecked (default)
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
DLP-G524 Provision the OTU2_XP Path Settings for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy Configuration
Purpose
|
This task changes the path settings of the OTU2_XP card for 10G Ethernet LAN Phy to WAN Phy configuration.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the OTU2_XP card where you want to change the path settings.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning > Path > SONET/SDH
tab. You can now provision the SF BER and SD BER values.
Step 3 Modify any of the OTU2_XP path settings described in
Table 6-133
.
Table 6-133 OTU2_XP Path Settings
|
|
|
ONS 15454 SDH (ETSI) Options
|
Port
|
Sets the port number.
|
-
Port 3-1 (trunk)
-
Port 4-1 trunk
|
-
Port 3-1 (trunk)
-
Port 4-1 trunk
|
SF BER
|
Sets the signal fail bit error rate (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]).
|
|
|
SD BER
|
Sets the signal degrade bit error rate (SONET [ANSI] or SDH [ETSI]).
|
|
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
.
Step 5 Return to your originating procedure (NTP).
NTP-G162 Change the ALS Maintenance Settings
Purpose
|
This procedure changes the ALS maintenance settings for the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function is normally disabled for TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP cards. Enable ALS only when the cards are directly connected to each other.
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, or OTU2_XP card where you want to change the ALS maintenance settings.
Step 2 Click the
Maintenance > ALS
tabs.
Step 3 Modify any of the settings described in
Table 6-134
. The provisionable parameters are listed in the Options column in the table.
Table 6-134 ALS Settings
|
|
|
ALS Mode
|
Automatic laser shutdown. ALS provides the ability to shut down the TXP, MXP, GE_XP, 10GE_XP, GE_XPE, 10GE_XPE, and OTU2_XP TX laser when the card detects an LOS.
|
From the drop-down list, choose one of the following:
-
Disable—Deactivates ALS.
-
Auto Restart—(Default) ALS is active. The power is automatically shut down when needed and automatically tries to restart using a probe pulse until the cause of the failure is repaired.
-
Manual Restart
-
Manual Restart for Test
|
Recovery Pulse Duration
|
(Display only) Displays the duration of the optical power pulse that begins when an amplifier restarts.
|
—
|
Recovery Pulse Interval
|
(Display only) Displays the interval between optical power pulses.
|
—
|
Currently Shutdown
|
(Display only) Displays the current status of the laser.
|
—
|
Request Laser Restart
|
If checked, allows you to restart the laser for maintenance.
|
Checked or unchecked
|
Step 4 Click
Apply
. If the change affects traffic, a warning message displays. Click Yes to complete the change.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G192 Force FPGA Update
Purpose
|
This procedure forces an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note Perform Step 1 through Step 4 if you are updating the node software. Otherwise continue with Step 5 to force FPGA image upgrade on MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 1 Close the CTC window, if open.
Step 2 Delete the CTC Cache from the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 3 Close the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 4 Relaunch the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 5 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf mode), double-click the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card to be upgraded.
Step 6 For all ports being provisioned on the card, click the
Provisioning > Line
tabs.
a. Click the
Admin State
table cell and choose
OOS,DSBLD
(ANSI) or
Locked,Disabled
(ETSI).
b. Click
Apply
, then
Yes
.
Step 7 Click the
Provisioning > Card
tabs.
Step 8 Change the Card Mode as needed:
-
FC-GE_ISC—Choose this option if you will provision any of the following PPM port rates: FC1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FC2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), FICON1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), FICON2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only), ONE_GE (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 COMPAT (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), ISC3 PEER 1G (Ports 1-1 through 4-1), and ISC3 PEER 2G (Ports 1-1 and 3-1 only).
-
FC4G—Choose this option if you will provision an FC4G or FICON4G PPM (Port 1-1 only).
Step 9 Click the
Force FPGA Update
button. This upgrades the FPGA image in the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card, as appropriate. The MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card reboots and the FPGA now contains the updated image.
Step 10 For all ports being provisioned on the card, click the
Provisioning > Line
tabs.
a. Click the
Admin State
table cell and choose
IS
(ANSI) or
Unlocked
(ETSI).
b. Click
Apply
, then
Yes
.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G196 Force FPGA Update When the Card is Part of a Protection Group
Purpose
|
This procedure forces an upgrade of the FPGA image on the MXP_MR_10DME_C and MXP_MR_10DME_L cards when the card is part of a protection group.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Note This procedure applies to a near-end node that has two MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L cards, one card acting as the working card and the other as the protect card. The far-end node has a similar configuration. The near-end working card trunk port is connected to the far-end working card trunk port. The near-end protect card trunk port is connected to the far-end protect card trunk port.
Note Perform Step 1 through Step 4 if you are updating the node software. Otherwise, continue with Step 5 to force FPGA image upgrade on MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 1 Close the CTC window, if open.
Step 2 Delete the CTC Cache from the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 3 Close the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 4 Relaunch the CTC Launcher browser window.
Step 5 Ensure traffic is running on the near-end and far-end working cards for each protection group on the MXP_MR_10DME_C or MXP_MR_10DME_L card.
Step 6 In node view (single-node mode) or multishelf view (multishelf mode), click the
Provisioning > Protection
tab.
Step 7 For each protection group, verify that the working card client port is reported as working/active and the protect card client port is reported as protect/standby.
Step 8 Repeat Steps
6
and
7
for the far-end node.
Step 9 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the G182 Apply a Lockout to prevent traffic from switching to the protect card.
Step 10 At the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the G192 Force FPGA Update to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the protect card.
Step 11 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the G183 Clear a Lock-On or Lockout to remove a lockout and return a protection group to its usual switching method.
Step 12 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete theG179 Apply a Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch to move traffic from the working to the protect card.
Step 13 At the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the G192 Force FPGA Update to force an upgrade of the FPGA image on the working card.
Step 14 For each protection group on the near-end and far-end nodes, complete the G180 Clear a Manual or Force Y-Cable or Splitter Protection Switch to clear a Force protection switch on the working card. If the protection group is revertive, this operation causes the traffic to revert to the working card. If the protection group is non-revertive, this operation causes the traffic to remain on the protect card.
Stop. You have completed this procedure.
NTP-G232 Enabling Error Decorrelator
Purpose
|
This task enables error decorrelator on a TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card.
|
Tools/Equipment
|
None
|
Prerequisite Procedures
|
G46 Log into CTC
|
Required/As Needed
|
As needed
|
Onsite/Remote
|
Onsite or remote
|
Security Level
|
Provisioning or higher
|
Step 1 In node view (single-shelf mode) or shelf view (multishelf view), double-click the TXP_MR_10EX_C, MXP_2.5G_10EX_C, or MXP_MR_10DMEX_C card where you want to enable error decorrelator.
Step 2 Click the
Provisioning
> Line>
Error Decorrelator Settings tabs.
Step 3 In the Error Decorrelator Settings area, Select Enable.
Note To inter-operate with other cards, disable the error decorrelator.
Click the Provisioning > Line> Error Decorrelator Settings tabs and then select Disable.